Fix spelling mistakes and typos in the GAS sources.
[deliverable/binutils-gdb.git] / gas / doc / as.texinfo
1 \input texinfo @c -*-Texinfo-*-
2 @c Copyright (C) 1991-2017 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
3 @c UPDATE!! On future updates--
4 @c (1) check for new machine-dep cmdline options in
5 @c md_parse_option definitions in config/tc-*.c
6 @c (2) for platform-specific directives, examine md_pseudo_op
7 @c in config/tc-*.c
8 @c (3) for object-format specific directives, examine obj_pseudo_op
9 @c in config/obj-*.c
10 @c (4) portable directives in potable[] in read.c
11 @c %**start of header
12 @setfilename as.info
13 @c ---config---
14 @macro gcctabopt{body}
15 @code{\body\}
16 @end macro
17 @c defaults, config file may override:
18 @set have-stabs
19 @c ---
20 @c man begin NAME
21 @c ---
22 @include asconfig.texi
23 @include bfdver.texi
24 @c ---
25 @c man end
26 @c ---
27 @c common OR combinations of conditions
28 @ifset COFF
29 @set COFF-ELF
30 @end ifset
31 @ifset ELF
32 @set COFF-ELF
33 @end ifset
34 @ifset AOUT
35 @set aout-bout
36 @end ifset
37 @ifset ARM/Thumb
38 @set ARM
39 @end ifset
40 @ifset Blackfin
41 @set Blackfin
42 @end ifset
43 @ifset BOUT
44 @set aout-bout
45 @end ifset
46 @ifset H8/300
47 @set H8
48 @end ifset
49 @ifset SH
50 @set H8
51 @end ifset
52 @ifset HPPA
53 @set abnormal-separator
54 @end ifset
55 @c ------------
56 @ifset GENERIC
57 @settitle Using @value{AS}
58 @end ifset
59 @ifclear GENERIC
60 @settitle Using @value{AS} (@value{TARGET})
61 @end ifclear
62 @setchapternewpage odd
63 @c %**end of header
64
65 @c @smallbook
66 @c @set SMALL
67 @c WARE! Some of the machine-dependent sections contain tables of machine
68 @c instructions. Except in multi-column format, these tables look silly.
69 @c Unfortunately, Texinfo doesn't have a general-purpose multi-col format, so
70 @c the multi-col format is faked within @example sections.
71 @c
72 @c Again unfortunately, the natural size that fits on a page, for these tables,
73 @c is different depending on whether or not smallbook is turned on.
74 @c This matters, because of order: text flow switches columns at each page
75 @c break.
76 @c
77 @c The format faked in this source works reasonably well for smallbook,
78 @c not well for the default large-page format. This manual expects that if you
79 @c turn on @smallbook, you will also uncomment the "@set SMALL" to enable the
80 @c tables in question. You can turn on one without the other at your
81 @c discretion, of course.
82 @ifinfo
83 @set SMALL
84 @c the insn tables look just as silly in info files regardless of smallbook,
85 @c might as well show 'em anyways.
86 @end ifinfo
87
88 @ifnottex
89 @dircategory Software development
90 @direntry
91 * As: (as). The GNU assembler.
92 * Gas: (as). The GNU assembler.
93 @end direntry
94 @end ifnottex
95
96 @finalout
97 @syncodeindex ky cp
98
99 @copying
100 This file documents the GNU Assembler "@value{AS}".
101
102 @c man begin COPYRIGHT
103 Copyright @copyright{} 1991-2017 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
104
105 Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document
106 under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License, Version 1.3
107 or any later version published by the Free Software Foundation;
108 with no Invariant Sections, with no Front-Cover Texts, and with no
109 Back-Cover Texts. A copy of the license is included in the
110 section entitled ``GNU Free Documentation License''.
111
112 @c man end
113 @end copying
114
115 @titlepage
116 @title Using @value{AS}
117 @subtitle The @sc{gnu} Assembler
118 @ifclear GENERIC
119 @subtitle for the @value{TARGET} family
120 @end ifclear
121 @ifset VERSION_PACKAGE
122 @sp 1
123 @subtitle @value{VERSION_PACKAGE}
124 @end ifset
125 @sp 1
126 @subtitle Version @value{VERSION}
127 @sp 1
128 @sp 13
129 The Free Software Foundation Inc.@: thanks The Nice Computer
130 Company of Australia for loaning Dean Elsner to write the
131 first (Vax) version of @command{as} for Project @sc{gnu}.
132 The proprietors, management and staff of TNCCA thank FSF for
133 distracting the boss while they got some work
134 done.
135 @sp 3
136 @author Dean Elsner, Jay Fenlason & friends
137 @page
138 @tex
139 {\parskip=0pt
140 \hfill {\it Using {\tt @value{AS}}}\par
141 \hfill Edited by Cygnus Support\par
142 }
143 %"boxit" macro for figures:
144 %Modified from Knuth's ``boxit'' macro from TeXbook (answer to exercise 21.3)
145 \gdef\boxit#1#2{\vbox{\hrule\hbox{\vrule\kern3pt
146 \vbox{\parindent=0pt\parskip=0pt\hsize=#1\kern3pt\strut\hfil
147 #2\hfil\strut\kern3pt}\kern3pt\vrule}\hrule}}%box with visible outline
148 \gdef\ibox#1#2{\hbox to #1{#2\hfil}\kern8pt}% invisible box
149 @end tex
150
151 @vskip 0pt plus 1filll
152 Copyright @copyright{} 1991-2017 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
153
154 Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document
155 under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License, Version 1.3
156 or any later version published by the Free Software Foundation;
157 with no Invariant Sections, with no Front-Cover Texts, and with no
158 Back-Cover Texts. A copy of the license is included in the
159 section entitled ``GNU Free Documentation License''.
160
161 @end titlepage
162 @contents
163
164 @ifnottex
165 @node Top
166 @top Using @value{AS}
167
168 This file is a user guide to the @sc{gnu} assembler @command{@value{AS}}
169 @ifset VERSION_PACKAGE
170 @value{VERSION_PACKAGE}
171 @end ifset
172 version @value{VERSION}.
173 @ifclear GENERIC
174 This version of the file describes @command{@value{AS}} configured to generate
175 code for @value{TARGET} architectures.
176 @end ifclear
177
178 This document is distributed under the terms of the GNU Free
179 Documentation License. A copy of the license is included in the
180 section entitled ``GNU Free Documentation License''.
181
182 @menu
183 * Overview:: Overview
184 * Invoking:: Command-Line Options
185 * Syntax:: Syntax
186 * Sections:: Sections and Relocation
187 * Symbols:: Symbols
188 * Expressions:: Expressions
189 * Pseudo Ops:: Assembler Directives
190 @ifset ELF
191 * Object Attributes:: Object Attributes
192 @end ifset
193 * Machine Dependencies:: Machine Dependent Features
194 * Reporting Bugs:: Reporting Bugs
195 * Acknowledgements:: Who Did What
196 * GNU Free Documentation License:: GNU Free Documentation License
197 * AS Index:: AS Index
198 @end menu
199 @end ifnottex
200
201 @node Overview
202 @chapter Overview
203 @iftex
204 This manual is a user guide to the @sc{gnu} assembler @command{@value{AS}}.
205 @ifclear GENERIC
206 This version of the manual describes @command{@value{AS}} configured to generate
207 code for @value{TARGET} architectures.
208 @end ifclear
209 @end iftex
210
211 @cindex invocation summary
212 @cindex option summary
213 @cindex summary of options
214 Here is a brief summary of how to invoke @command{@value{AS}}. For details,
215 see @ref{Invoking,,Command-Line Options}.
216
217 @c man title AS the portable GNU assembler.
218
219 @ignore
220 @c man begin SEEALSO
221 gcc(1), ld(1), and the Info entries for @file{binutils} and @file{ld}.
222 @c man end
223 @end ignore
224
225 @c We don't use deffn and friends for the following because they seem
226 @c to be limited to one line for the header.
227 @smallexample
228 @c man begin SYNOPSIS
229 @value{AS} [@b{-a}[@b{cdghlns}][=@var{file}]] [@b{--alternate}] [@b{-D}]
230 [@b{--compress-debug-sections}] [@b{--nocompress-debug-sections}]
231 [@b{--debug-prefix-map} @var{old}=@var{new}]
232 [@b{--defsym} @var{sym}=@var{val}] [@b{-f}] [@b{-g}] [@b{--gstabs}]
233 [@b{--gstabs+}] [@b{--gdwarf-2}] [@b{--gdwarf-sections}]
234 [@b{--help}] [@b{-I} @var{dir}] [@b{-J}]
235 [@b{-K}] [@b{-L}] [@b{--listing-lhs-width}=@var{NUM}]
236 [@b{--listing-lhs-width2}=@var{NUM}] [@b{--listing-rhs-width}=@var{NUM}]
237 [@b{--listing-cont-lines}=@var{NUM}] [@b{--keep-locals}]
238 [@b{--no-pad-sections}]
239 [@b{-o} @var{objfile}] [@b{-R}]
240 [@b{--hash-size}=@var{NUM}] [@b{--reduce-memory-overheads}]
241 [@b{--statistics}]
242 [@b{-v}] [@b{-version}] [@b{--version}]
243 [@b{-W}] [@b{--warn}] [@b{--fatal-warnings}] [@b{-w}] [@b{-x}]
244 [@b{-Z}] [@b{@@@var{FILE}}]
245 [@b{--sectname-subst}] [@b{--size-check=[error|warning]}]
246 [@b{--elf-stt-common=[no|yes]}]
247 [@b{--target-help}] [@var{target-options}]
248 [@b{--}|@var{files} @dots{}]
249 @c
250 @c man end
251 @c Target dependent options are listed below. Keep the list sorted.
252 @c Add an empty line for separation.
253 @c man begin TARGET
254 @ifset AARCH64
255
256 @emph{Target AArch64 options:}
257 [@b{-EB}|@b{-EL}]
258 [@b{-mabi}=@var{ABI}]
259 @end ifset
260 @ifset ALPHA
261
262 @emph{Target Alpha options:}
263 [@b{-m@var{cpu}}]
264 [@b{-mdebug} | @b{-no-mdebug}]
265 [@b{-replace} | @b{-noreplace}]
266 [@b{-relax}] [@b{-g}] [@b{-G@var{size}}]
267 [@b{-F}] [@b{-32addr}]
268 @end ifset
269 @ifset ARC
270
271 @emph{Target ARC options:}
272 [@b{-mcpu=@var{cpu}}]
273 [@b{-mA6}|@b{-mARC600}|@b{-mARC601}|@b{-mA7}|@b{-mARC700}|@b{-mEM}|@b{-mHS}]
274 [@b{-mcode-density}]
275 [@b{-mrelax}]
276 [@b{-EB}|@b{-EL}]
277 @end ifset
278 @ifset ARM
279
280 @emph{Target ARM options:}
281 @c Don't document the deprecated options
282 [@b{-mcpu}=@var{processor}[+@var{extension}@dots{}]]
283 [@b{-march}=@var{architecture}[+@var{extension}@dots{}]]
284 [@b{-mfpu}=@var{floating-point-format}]
285 [@b{-mfloat-abi}=@var{abi}]
286 [@b{-meabi}=@var{ver}]
287 [@b{-mthumb}]
288 [@b{-EB}|@b{-EL}]
289 [@b{-mapcs-32}|@b{-mapcs-26}|@b{-mapcs-float}|
290 @b{-mapcs-reentrant}]
291 [@b{-mthumb-interwork}] [@b{-k}]
292 @end ifset
293 @ifset Blackfin
294
295 @emph{Target Blackfin options:}
296 [@b{-mcpu}=@var{processor}[-@var{sirevision}]]
297 [@b{-mfdpic}]
298 [@b{-mno-fdpic}]
299 [@b{-mnopic}]
300 @end ifset
301 @ifset CRIS
302
303 @emph{Target CRIS options:}
304 [@b{--underscore} | @b{--no-underscore}]
305 [@b{--pic}] [@b{-N}]
306 [@b{--emulation=criself} | @b{--emulation=crisaout}]
307 [@b{--march=v0_v10} | @b{--march=v10} | @b{--march=v32} | @b{--march=common_v10_v32}]
308 @c Deprecated -- deliberately not documented.
309 @c [@b{-h}] [@b{-H}]
310 @end ifset
311 @ifset D10V
312
313 @emph{Target D10V options:}
314 [@b{-O}]
315 @end ifset
316 @ifset D30V
317
318 @emph{Target D30V options:}
319 [@b{-O}|@b{-n}|@b{-N}]
320 @end ifset
321 @ifset EPIPHANY
322
323 @emph{Target EPIPHANY options:}
324 [@b{-mepiphany}|@b{-mepiphany16}]
325 @end ifset
326 @ifset H8
327
328 @emph{Target H8/300 options:}
329 [-h-tick-hex]
330 @end ifset
331 @ifset HPPA
332 @c HPPA has no machine-dependent assembler options (yet).
333 @end ifset
334 @ifset I80386
335
336 @emph{Target i386 options:}
337 [@b{--32}|@b{--x32}|@b{--64}] [@b{-n}]
338 [@b{-march}=@var{CPU}[+@var{EXTENSION}@dots{}]] [@b{-mtune}=@var{CPU}]
339 @end ifset
340 @ifset I960
341
342 @emph{Target i960 options:}
343 @c see md_parse_option in tc-i960.c
344 [@b{-ACA}|@b{-ACA_A}|@b{-ACB}|@b{-ACC}|@b{-AKA}|@b{-AKB}|
345 @b{-AKC}|@b{-AMC}]
346 [@b{-b}] [@b{-no-relax}]
347 @end ifset
348 @ifset IA64
349
350 @emph{Target IA-64 options:}
351 [@b{-mconstant-gp}|@b{-mauto-pic}]
352 [@b{-milp32}|@b{-milp64}|@b{-mlp64}|@b{-mp64}]
353 [@b{-mle}|@b{mbe}]
354 [@b{-mtune=itanium1}|@b{-mtune=itanium2}]
355 [@b{-munwind-check=warning}|@b{-munwind-check=error}]
356 [@b{-mhint.b=ok}|@b{-mhint.b=warning}|@b{-mhint.b=error}]
357 [@b{-x}|@b{-xexplicit}] [@b{-xauto}] [@b{-xdebug}]
358 @end ifset
359 @ifset IP2K
360
361 @emph{Target IP2K options:}
362 [@b{-mip2022}|@b{-mip2022ext}]
363 @end ifset
364 @ifset M32C
365
366 @emph{Target M32C options:}
367 [@b{-m32c}|@b{-m16c}] [-relax] [-h-tick-hex]
368 @end ifset
369 @ifset M32R
370
371 @emph{Target M32R options:}
372 [@b{--m32rx}|@b{--[no-]warn-explicit-parallel-conflicts}|
373 @b{--W[n]p}]
374 @end ifset
375 @ifset M680X0
376
377 @emph{Target M680X0 options:}
378 [@b{-l}] [@b{-m68000}|@b{-m68010}|@b{-m68020}|@dots{}]
379 @end ifset
380 @ifset M68HC11
381
382 @emph{Target M68HC11 options:}
383 [@b{-m68hc11}|@b{-m68hc12}|@b{-m68hcs12}|@b{-mm9s12x}|@b{-mm9s12xg}]
384 [@b{-mshort}|@b{-mlong}]
385 [@b{-mshort-double}|@b{-mlong-double}]
386 [@b{--force-long-branches}] [@b{--short-branches}]
387 [@b{--strict-direct-mode}] [@b{--print-insn-syntax}]
388 [@b{--print-opcodes}] [@b{--generate-example}]
389 @end ifset
390 @ifset MCORE
391
392 @emph{Target MCORE options:}
393 [@b{-jsri2bsr}] [@b{-sifilter}] [@b{-relax}]
394 [@b{-mcpu=[210|340]}]
395 @end ifset
396 @ifset METAG
397
398 @emph{Target Meta options:}
399 [@b{-mcpu=@var{cpu}}] [@b{-mfpu=@var{cpu}}] [@b{-mdsp=@var{cpu}}]
400 @end ifset
401 @ifset MICROBLAZE
402 @emph{Target MICROBLAZE options:}
403 @c MicroBlaze has no machine-dependent assembler options.
404 @end ifset
405 @ifset MIPS
406
407 @emph{Target MIPS options:}
408 [@b{-nocpp}] [@b{-EL}] [@b{-EB}] [@b{-O}[@var{optimization level}]]
409 [@b{-g}[@var{debug level}]] [@b{-G} @var{num}] [@b{-KPIC}] [@b{-call_shared}]
410 [@b{-non_shared}] [@b{-xgot} [@b{-mvxworks-pic}]
411 [@b{-mabi}=@var{ABI}] [@b{-32}] [@b{-n32}] [@b{-64}] [@b{-mfp32}] [@b{-mgp32}]
412 [@b{-mfp64}] [@b{-mgp64}] [@b{-mfpxx}]
413 [@b{-modd-spreg}] [@b{-mno-odd-spreg}]
414 [@b{-march}=@var{CPU}] [@b{-mtune}=@var{CPU}] [@b{-mips1}] [@b{-mips2}]
415 [@b{-mips3}] [@b{-mips4}] [@b{-mips5}] [@b{-mips32}] [@b{-mips32r2}]
416 [@b{-mips32r3}] [@b{-mips32r5}] [@b{-mips32r6}] [@b{-mips64}] [@b{-mips64r2}]
417 [@b{-mips64r3}] [@b{-mips64r5}] [@b{-mips64r6}]
418 [@b{-construct-floats}] [@b{-no-construct-floats}]
419 [@b{-mnan=@var{encoding}}]
420 [@b{-trap}] [@b{-no-break}] [@b{-break}] [@b{-no-trap}]
421 [@b{-mips16}] [@b{-no-mips16}]
422 [@b{-mmicromips}] [@b{-mno-micromips}]
423 [@b{-msmartmips}] [@b{-mno-smartmips}]
424 [@b{-mips3d}] [@b{-no-mips3d}]
425 [@b{-mdmx}] [@b{-no-mdmx}]
426 [@b{-mdsp}] [@b{-mno-dsp}]
427 [@b{-mdspr2}] [@b{-mno-dspr2}]
428 [@b{-mdspr3}] [@b{-mno-dspr3}]
429 [@b{-mmsa}] [@b{-mno-msa}]
430 [@b{-mxpa}] [@b{-mno-xpa}]
431 [@b{-mmt}] [@b{-mno-mt}]
432 [@b{-mmcu}] [@b{-mno-mcu}]
433 [@b{-minsn32}] [@b{-mno-insn32}]
434 [@b{-mfix7000}] [@b{-mno-fix7000}]
435 [@b{-mfix-rm7000}] [@b{-mno-fix-rm7000}]
436 [@b{-mfix-vr4120}] [@b{-mno-fix-vr4120}]
437 [@b{-mfix-vr4130}] [@b{-mno-fix-vr4130}]
438 [@b{-mdebug}] [@b{-no-mdebug}]
439 [@b{-mpdr}] [@b{-mno-pdr}]
440 @end ifset
441 @ifset MMIX
442
443 @emph{Target MMIX options:}
444 [@b{--fixed-special-register-names}] [@b{--globalize-symbols}]
445 [@b{--gnu-syntax}] [@b{--relax}] [@b{--no-predefined-symbols}]
446 [@b{--no-expand}] [@b{--no-merge-gregs}] [@b{-x}]
447 [@b{--linker-allocated-gregs}]
448 @end ifset
449 @ifset NIOSII
450
451 @emph{Target Nios II options:}
452 [@b{-relax-all}] [@b{-relax-section}] [@b{-no-relax}]
453 [@b{-EB}] [@b{-EL}]
454 @end ifset
455 @ifset NDS32
456
457 @emph{Target NDS32 options:}
458 [@b{-EL}] [@b{-EB}] [@b{-O}] [@b{-Os}] [@b{-mcpu=@var{cpu}}]
459 [@b{-misa=@var{isa}}] [@b{-mabi=@var{abi}}] [@b{-mall-ext}]
460 [@b{-m[no-]16-bit}] [@b{-m[no-]perf-ext}] [@b{-m[no-]perf2-ext}]
461 [@b{-m[no-]string-ext}] [@b{-m[no-]dsp-ext}] [@b{-m[no-]mac}] [@b{-m[no-]div}]
462 [@b{-m[no-]audio-isa-ext}] [@b{-m[no-]fpu-sp-ext}] [@b{-m[no-]fpu-dp-ext}]
463 [@b{-m[no-]fpu-fma}] [@b{-mfpu-freg=@var{FREG}}] [@b{-mreduced-regs}]
464 [@b{-mfull-regs}] [@b{-m[no-]dx-regs}] [@b{-mpic}] [@b{-mno-relax}]
465 [@b{-mb2bb}]
466 @end ifset
467 @ifset PDP11
468
469 @emph{Target PDP11 options:}
470 [@b{-mpic}|@b{-mno-pic}] [@b{-mall}] [@b{-mno-extensions}]
471 [@b{-m}@var{extension}|@b{-mno-}@var{extension}]
472 [@b{-m}@var{cpu}] [@b{-m}@var{machine}]
473 @end ifset
474 @ifset PJ
475
476 @emph{Target picoJava options:}
477 [@b{-mb}|@b{-me}]
478 @end ifset
479 @ifset PPC
480
481 @emph{Target PowerPC options:}
482 [@b{-a32}|@b{-a64}]
483 [@b{-mpwrx}|@b{-mpwr2}|@b{-mpwr}|@b{-m601}|@b{-mppc}|@b{-mppc32}|@b{-m603}|@b{-m604}|@b{-m403}|@b{-m405}|
484 @b{-m440}|@b{-m464}|@b{-m476}|@b{-m7400}|@b{-m7410}|@b{-m7450}|@b{-m7455}|@b{-m750cl}|@b{-mppc64}|
485 @b{-m620}|@b{-me500}|@b{-e500x2}|@b{-me500mc}|@b{-me500mc64}|@b{-me5500}|@b{-me6500}|@b{-mppc64bridge}|
486 @b{-mbooke}|@b{-mpower4}|@b{-mpwr4}|@b{-mpower5}|@b{-mpwr5}|@b{-mpwr5x}|@b{-mpower6}|@b{-mpwr6}|
487 @b{-mpower7}|@b{-mpwr7}|@b{-mpower8}|@b{-mpwr8}|@b{-mpower9}|@b{-mpwr9}@b{-ma2}|
488 @b{-mcell}|@b{-mspe}|@b{-mtitan}|@b{-me300}|@b{-mcom}]
489 [@b{-many}] [@b{-maltivec}|@b{-mvsx}|@b{-mhtm}|@b{-mvle}]
490 [@b{-mregnames}|@b{-mno-regnames}]
491 [@b{-mrelocatable}|@b{-mrelocatable-lib}|@b{-K PIC}] [@b{-memb}]
492 [@b{-mlittle}|@b{-mlittle-endian}|@b{-le}|@b{-mbig}|@b{-mbig-endian}|@b{-be}]
493 [@b{-msolaris}|@b{-mno-solaris}]
494 [@b{-nops=@var{count}}]
495 @end ifset
496 @ifset PRU
497
498 @emph{Target PRU options:}
499 [@b{-link-relax}]
500 [@b{-mnolink-relax}]
501 [@b{-mno-warn-regname-label}]
502 @end ifset
503 @ifset RL78
504
505 @emph{Target RL78 options:}
506 [@b{-mg10}]
507 [@b{-m32bit-doubles}|@b{-m64bit-doubles}]
508 @end ifset
509 @ifset RX
510
511 @emph{Target RX options:}
512 [@b{-mlittle-endian}|@b{-mbig-endian}]
513 [@b{-m32bit-doubles}|@b{-m64bit-doubles}]
514 [@b{-muse-conventional-section-names}]
515 [@b{-msmall-data-limit}]
516 [@b{-mpid}]
517 [@b{-mrelax}]
518 [@b{-mint-register=@var{number}}]
519 [@b{-mgcc-abi}|@b{-mrx-abi}]
520 @end ifset
521 @ifset RISCV
522
523 @emph{Target RISC-V options:}
524 [@b{-march}=@var{ISA}]
525 [@b{-mabi}=@var{ABI}]
526 @end ifset
527 @ifset S390
528
529 @emph{Target s390 options:}
530 [@b{-m31}|@b{-m64}] [@b{-mesa}|@b{-mzarch}] [@b{-march}=@var{CPU}]
531 [@b{-mregnames}|@b{-mno-regnames}]
532 [@b{-mwarn-areg-zero}]
533 @end ifset
534 @ifset SCORE
535
536 @emph{Target SCORE options:}
537 [@b{-EB}][@b{-EL}][@b{-FIXDD}][@b{-NWARN}]
538 [@b{-SCORE5}][@b{-SCORE5U}][@b{-SCORE7}][@b{-SCORE3}]
539 [@b{-march=score7}][@b{-march=score3}]
540 [@b{-USE_R1}][@b{-KPIC}][@b{-O0}][@b{-G} @var{num}][@b{-V}]
541 @end ifset
542 @ifset SPARC
543
544 @emph{Target SPARC options:}
545 @c The order here is important. See c-sparc.texi.
546 [@b{-Av6}|@b{-Av7}|@b{-Av8}|@b{-Aleon}|@b{-Asparclet}|@b{-Asparclite}
547 @b{-Av8plus}|@b{-Av8plusa}|@b{-Av8plusb}|@b{-Av8plusc}|@b{-Av8plusd}
548 @b{-Av8plusv}|@b{-Av8plusm}|@b{-Av9}|@b{-Av9a}|@b{-Av9b}|@b{-Av9c}
549 @b{-Av9d}|@b{-Av9e}|@b{-Av9v}|@b{-Av9m}|@b{-Asparc}|@b{-Asparcvis}
550 @b{-Asparcvis2}|@b{-Asparcfmaf}|@b{-Asparcima}|@b{-Asparcvis3}
551 @b{-Asparcvisr}|@b{-Asparc5}]
552 [@b{-xarch=v8plus}|@b{-xarch=v8plusa}]|@b{-xarch=v8plusb}|@b{-xarch=v8plusc}
553 @b{-xarch=v8plusd}|@b{-xarch=v8plusv}|@b{-xarch=v8plusm}|@b{-xarch=v9}
554 @b{-xarch=v9a}|@b{-xarch=v9b}|@b{-xarch=v9c}|@b{-xarch=v9d}|@b{-xarch=v9e}
555 @b{-xarch=v9v}|@b{-xarch=v9m}|@b{-xarch=sparc}|@b{-xarch=sparcvis}
556 @b{-xarch=sparcvis2}|@b{-xarch=sparcfmaf}|@b{-xarch=sparcima}
557 @b{-xarch=sparcvis3}|@b{-xarch=sparcvisr}|@b{-xarch=sparc5}
558 @b{-bump}]
559 [@b{-32}|@b{-64}]
560 [@b{--enforce-aligned-data}][@b{--dcti-couples-detect}]
561 @end ifset
562 @ifset TIC54X
563
564 @emph{Target TIC54X options:}
565 [@b{-mcpu=54[123589]}|@b{-mcpu=54[56]lp}] [@b{-mfar-mode}|@b{-mf}]
566 [@b{-merrors-to-file} @var{<filename>}|@b{-me} @var{<filename>}]
567 @end ifset
568 @ifset TIC6X
569
570 @emph{Target TIC6X options:}
571 [@b{-march=@var{arch}}] [@b{-mbig-endian}|@b{-mlittle-endian}]
572 [@b{-mdsbt}|@b{-mno-dsbt}] [@b{-mpid=no}|@b{-mpid=near}|@b{-mpid=far}]
573 [@b{-mpic}|@b{-mno-pic}]
574 @end ifset
575 @ifset TILEGX
576
577 @emph{Target TILE-Gx options:}
578 [@b{-m32}|@b{-m64}][@b{-EB}][@b{-EL}]
579 @end ifset
580 @ifset TILEPRO
581 @c TILEPro has no machine-dependent assembler options
582 @end ifset
583 @ifset VISIUM
584
585 @emph{Target Visium options:}
586 [@b{-mtune=@var{arch}}]
587 @end ifset
588 @ifset XTENSA
589
590 @emph{Target Xtensa options:}
591 [@b{--[no-]text-section-literals}] [@b{--[no-]auto-litpools}]
592 [@b{--[no-]absolute-literals}]
593 [@b{--[no-]target-align}] [@b{--[no-]longcalls}]
594 [@b{--[no-]transform}]
595 [@b{--rename-section} @var{oldname}=@var{newname}]
596 [@b{--[no-]trampolines}]
597 @end ifset
598 @ifset Z80
599
600 @emph{Target Z80 options:}
601 [@b{-z80}] [@b{-r800}]
602 [@b{ -ignore-undocumented-instructions}] [@b{-Wnud}]
603 [@b{ -ignore-unportable-instructions}] [@b{-Wnup}]
604 [@b{ -warn-undocumented-instructions}] [@b{-Wud}]
605 [@b{ -warn-unportable-instructions}] [@b{-Wup}]
606 [@b{ -forbid-undocumented-instructions}] [@b{-Fud}]
607 [@b{ -forbid-unportable-instructions}] [@b{-Fup}]
608 @end ifset
609 @ifset Z8000
610
611 @c Z8000 has no machine-dependent assembler options
612 @end ifset
613
614 @c man end
615 @end smallexample
616
617 @c man begin OPTIONS
618
619 @table @gcctabopt
620 @include at-file.texi
621
622 @item -a[cdghlmns]
623 Turn on listings, in any of a variety of ways:
624
625 @table @gcctabopt
626 @item -ac
627 omit false conditionals
628
629 @item -ad
630 omit debugging directives
631
632 @item -ag
633 include general information, like @value{AS} version and options passed
634
635 @item -ah
636 include high-level source
637
638 @item -al
639 include assembly
640
641 @item -am
642 include macro expansions
643
644 @item -an
645 omit forms processing
646
647 @item -as
648 include symbols
649
650 @item =file
651 set the name of the listing file
652 @end table
653
654 You may combine these options; for example, use @samp{-aln} for assembly
655 listing without forms processing. The @samp{=file} option, if used, must be
656 the last one. By itself, @samp{-a} defaults to @samp{-ahls}.
657
658 @item --alternate
659 Begin in alternate macro mode.
660 @ifclear man
661 @xref{Altmacro,,@code{.altmacro}}.
662 @end ifclear
663
664 @item --compress-debug-sections
665 Compress DWARF debug sections using zlib with SHF_COMPRESSED from the
666 ELF ABI. The resulting object file may not be compatible with older
667 linkers and object file utilities. Note if compression would make a
668 given section @emph{larger} then it is not compressed.
669
670 @ifset ELF
671 @cindex @samp{--compress-debug-sections=} option
672 @item --compress-debug-sections=none
673 @itemx --compress-debug-sections=zlib
674 @itemx --compress-debug-sections=zlib-gnu
675 @itemx --compress-debug-sections=zlib-gabi
676 These options control how DWARF debug sections are compressed.
677 @option{--compress-debug-sections=none} is equivalent to
678 @option{--nocompress-debug-sections}.
679 @option{--compress-debug-sections=zlib} and
680 @option{--compress-debug-sections=zlib-gabi} are equivalent to
681 @option{--compress-debug-sections}.
682 @option{--compress-debug-sections=zlib-gnu} compresses DWARF debug
683 sections using zlib. The debug sections are renamed to begin with
684 @samp{.zdebug}. Note if compression would make a given section
685 @emph{larger} then it is not compressed nor renamed.
686
687 @end ifset
688
689 @item --nocompress-debug-sections
690 Do not compress DWARF debug sections. This is usually the default for all
691 targets except the x86/x86_64, but a configure time option can be used to
692 override this.
693
694 @item -D
695 Ignored. This option is accepted for script compatibility with calls to
696 other assemblers.
697
698 @item --debug-prefix-map @var{old}=@var{new}
699 When assembling files in directory @file{@var{old}}, record debugging
700 information describing them as in @file{@var{new}} instead.
701
702 @item --defsym @var{sym}=@var{value}
703 Define the symbol @var{sym} to be @var{value} before assembling the input file.
704 @var{value} must be an integer constant. As in C, a leading @samp{0x}
705 indicates a hexadecimal value, and a leading @samp{0} indicates an octal
706 value. The value of the symbol can be overridden inside a source file via the
707 use of a @code{.set} pseudo-op.
708
709 @item -f
710 ``fast''---skip whitespace and comment preprocessing (assume source is
711 compiler output).
712
713 @item -g
714 @itemx --gen-debug
715 Generate debugging information for each assembler source line using whichever
716 debug format is preferred by the target. This currently means either STABS,
717 ECOFF or DWARF2.
718
719 @item --gstabs
720 Generate stabs debugging information for each assembler line. This
721 may help debugging assembler code, if the debugger can handle it.
722
723 @item --gstabs+
724 Generate stabs debugging information for each assembler line, with GNU
725 extensions that probably only gdb can handle, and that could make other
726 debuggers crash or refuse to read your program. This
727 may help debugging assembler code. Currently the only GNU extension is
728 the location of the current working directory at assembling time.
729
730 @item --gdwarf-2
731 Generate DWARF2 debugging information for each assembler line. This
732 may help debugging assembler code, if the debugger can handle it. Note---this
733 option is only supported by some targets, not all of them.
734
735 @item --gdwarf-sections
736 Instead of creating a .debug_line section, create a series of
737 .debug_line.@var{foo} sections where @var{foo} is the name of the
738 corresponding code section. For example a code section called @var{.text.func}
739 will have its dwarf line number information placed into a section called
740 @var{.debug_line.text.func}. If the code section is just called @var{.text}
741 then debug line section will still be called just @var{.debug_line} without any
742 suffix.
743
744 @ifset ELF
745 @item --size-check=error
746 @itemx --size-check=warning
747 Issue an error or warning for invalid ELF .size directive.
748
749 @item --elf-stt-common=no
750 @itemx --elf-stt-common=yes
751 These options control whether the ELF assembler should generate common
752 symbols with the @code{STT_COMMON} type. The default can be controlled
753 by a configure option @option{--enable-elf-stt-common}.
754 @end ifset
755
756 @item --help
757 Print a summary of the command line options and exit.
758
759 @item --target-help
760 Print a summary of all target specific options and exit.
761
762 @item -I @var{dir}
763 Add directory @var{dir} to the search list for @code{.include} directives.
764
765 @item -J
766 Don't warn about signed overflow.
767
768 @item -K
769 @ifclear DIFF-TBL-KLUGE
770 This option is accepted but has no effect on the @value{TARGET} family.
771 @end ifclear
772 @ifset DIFF-TBL-KLUGE
773 Issue warnings when difference tables altered for long displacements.
774 @end ifset
775
776 @item -L
777 @itemx --keep-locals
778 Keep (in the symbol table) local symbols. These symbols start with
779 system-specific local label prefixes, typically @samp{.L} for ELF systems
780 or @samp{L} for traditional a.out systems.
781 @ifclear man
782 @xref{Symbol Names}.
783 @end ifclear
784
785 @item --listing-lhs-width=@var{number}
786 Set the maximum width, in words, of the output data column for an assembler
787 listing to @var{number}.
788
789 @item --listing-lhs-width2=@var{number}
790 Set the maximum width, in words, of the output data column for continuation
791 lines in an assembler listing to @var{number}.
792
793 @item --listing-rhs-width=@var{number}
794 Set the maximum width of an input source line, as displayed in a listing, to
795 @var{number} bytes.
796
797 @item --listing-cont-lines=@var{number}
798 Set the maximum number of lines printed in a listing for a single line of input
799 to @var{number} + 1.
800
801 @item --no-pad-sections
802 Stop the assembler for padding the ends of output sections to the alignment
803 of that section. The default is to pad the sections, but this can waste space
804 which might be needed on targets which have tight memory constraints.
805
806 @item -o @var{objfile}
807 Name the object-file output from @command{@value{AS}} @var{objfile}.
808
809 @item -R
810 Fold the data section into the text section.
811
812 @item --hash-size=@var{number}
813 Set the default size of GAS's hash tables to a prime number close to
814 @var{number}. Increasing this value can reduce the length of time it takes the
815 assembler to perform its tasks, at the expense of increasing the assembler's
816 memory requirements. Similarly reducing this value can reduce the memory
817 requirements at the expense of speed.
818
819 @item --reduce-memory-overheads
820 This option reduces GAS's memory requirements, at the expense of making the
821 assembly processes slower. Currently this switch is a synonym for
822 @samp{--hash-size=4051}, but in the future it may have other effects as well.
823
824 @ifset ELF
825 @item --sectname-subst
826 Honor substitution sequences in section names.
827 @ifclear man
828 @xref{Section Name Substitutions,,@code{.section @var{name}}}.
829 @end ifclear
830 @end ifset
831
832 @item --statistics
833 Print the maximum space (in bytes) and total time (in seconds) used by
834 assembly.
835
836 @item --strip-local-absolute
837 Remove local absolute symbols from the outgoing symbol table.
838
839 @item -v
840 @itemx -version
841 Print the @command{as} version.
842
843 @item --version
844 Print the @command{as} version and exit.
845
846 @item -W
847 @itemx --no-warn
848 Suppress warning messages.
849
850 @item --fatal-warnings
851 Treat warnings as errors.
852
853 @item --warn
854 Don't suppress warning messages or treat them as errors.
855
856 @item -w
857 Ignored.
858
859 @item -x
860 Ignored.
861
862 @item -Z
863 Generate an object file even after errors.
864
865 @item -- | @var{files} @dots{}
866 Standard input, or source files to assemble.
867
868 @end table
869 @c man end
870
871 @ifset AARCH64
872
873 @ifclear man
874 @xref{AArch64 Options}, for the options available when @value{AS} is configured
875 for the 64-bit mode of the ARM Architecture (AArch64).
876 @end ifclear
877
878 @ifset man
879 @c man begin OPTIONS
880 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for the
881 64-bit mode of the ARM Architecture (AArch64).
882 @c man end
883 @c man begin INCLUDE
884 @include c-aarch64.texi
885 @c ended inside the included file
886 @end ifset
887
888 @end ifset
889
890 @ifset ALPHA
891
892 @ifclear man
893 @xref{Alpha Options}, for the options available when @value{AS} is configured
894 for an Alpha processor.
895 @end ifclear
896
897 @ifset man
898 @c man begin OPTIONS
899 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for an Alpha
900 processor.
901 @c man end
902 @c man begin INCLUDE
903 @include c-alpha.texi
904 @c ended inside the included file
905 @end ifset
906
907 @end ifset
908
909 @c man begin OPTIONS
910 @ifset ARC
911 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for an ARC
912 processor.
913
914 @table @gcctabopt
915 @item -mcpu=@var{cpu}
916 This option selects the core processor variant.
917 @item -EB | -EL
918 Select either big-endian (-EB) or little-endian (-EL) output.
919 @item -mcode-density
920 Enable Code Density extenssion instructions.
921 @end table
922 @end ifset
923
924 @ifset ARM
925 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for the ARM
926 processor family.
927
928 @table @gcctabopt
929 @item -mcpu=@var{processor}[+@var{extension}@dots{}]
930 Specify which ARM processor variant is the target.
931 @item -march=@var{architecture}[+@var{extension}@dots{}]
932 Specify which ARM architecture variant is used by the target.
933 @item -mfpu=@var{floating-point-format}
934 Select which Floating Point architecture is the target.
935 @item -mfloat-abi=@var{abi}
936 Select which floating point ABI is in use.
937 @item -mthumb
938 Enable Thumb only instruction decoding.
939 @item -mapcs-32 | -mapcs-26 | -mapcs-float | -mapcs-reentrant
940 Select which procedure calling convention is in use.
941 @item -EB | -EL
942 Select either big-endian (-EB) or little-endian (-EL) output.
943 @item -mthumb-interwork
944 Specify that the code has been generated with interworking between Thumb and
945 ARM code in mind.
946 @item -mccs
947 Turns on CodeComposer Studio assembly syntax compatibility mode.
948 @item -k
949 Specify that PIC code has been generated.
950 @end table
951 @end ifset
952 @c man end
953
954 @ifset Blackfin
955
956 @ifclear man
957 @xref{Blackfin Options}, for the options available when @value{AS} is
958 configured for the Blackfin processor family.
959 @end ifclear
960
961 @ifset man
962 @c man begin OPTIONS
963 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for
964 the Blackfin processor family.
965 @c man end
966 @c man begin INCLUDE
967 @include c-bfin.texi
968 @c ended inside the included file
969 @end ifset
970
971 @end ifset
972
973 @c man begin OPTIONS
974 @ifset CRIS
975 See the info pages for documentation of the CRIS-specific options.
976 @end ifset
977
978 @ifset D10V
979 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for
980 a D10V processor.
981 @table @gcctabopt
982 @cindex D10V optimization
983 @cindex optimization, D10V
984 @item -O
985 Optimize output by parallelizing instructions.
986 @end table
987 @end ifset
988
989 @ifset D30V
990 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for a D30V
991 processor.
992 @table @gcctabopt
993 @cindex D30V optimization
994 @cindex optimization, D30V
995 @item -O
996 Optimize output by parallelizing instructions.
997
998 @cindex D30V nops
999 @item -n
1000 Warn when nops are generated.
1001
1002 @cindex D30V nops after 32-bit multiply
1003 @item -N
1004 Warn when a nop after a 32-bit multiply instruction is generated.
1005 @end table
1006 @end ifset
1007 @c man end
1008
1009 @ifset EPIPHANY
1010 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for the
1011 Adapteva EPIPHANY series.
1012
1013 @ifclear man
1014 @xref{Epiphany Options}, for the options available when @value{AS} is
1015 configured for an Epiphany processor.
1016 @end ifclear
1017
1018 @ifset man
1019 @c man begin OPTIONS
1020 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for
1021 an Epiphany processor.
1022 @c man end
1023 @c man begin INCLUDE
1024 @include c-epiphany.texi
1025 @c ended inside the included file
1026 @end ifset
1027
1028 @end ifset
1029
1030 @ifset H8300
1031
1032 @ifclear man
1033 @xref{H8/300 Options}, for the options available when @value{AS} is configured
1034 for an H8/300 processor.
1035 @end ifclear
1036
1037 @ifset man
1038 @c man begin OPTIONS
1039 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for an H8/300
1040 processor.
1041 @c man end
1042 @c man begin INCLUDE
1043 @include c-h8300.texi
1044 @c ended inside the included file
1045 @end ifset
1046
1047 @end ifset
1048
1049 @ifset I80386
1050
1051 @ifclear man
1052 @xref{i386-Options}, for the options available when @value{AS} is
1053 configured for an i386 processor.
1054 @end ifclear
1055
1056 @ifset man
1057 @c man begin OPTIONS
1058 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for
1059 an i386 processor.
1060 @c man end
1061 @c man begin INCLUDE
1062 @include c-i386.texi
1063 @c ended inside the included file
1064 @end ifset
1065
1066 @end ifset
1067
1068 @c man begin OPTIONS
1069 @ifset I960
1070 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for the
1071 Intel 80960 processor.
1072
1073 @table @gcctabopt
1074 @item -ACA | -ACA_A | -ACB | -ACC | -AKA | -AKB | -AKC | -AMC
1075 Specify which variant of the 960 architecture is the target.
1076
1077 @item -b
1078 Add code to collect statistics about branches taken.
1079
1080 @item -no-relax
1081 Do not alter compare-and-branch instructions for long displacements;
1082 error if necessary.
1083
1084 @end table
1085 @end ifset
1086
1087 @ifset IP2K
1088 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for the
1089 Ubicom IP2K series.
1090
1091 @table @gcctabopt
1092
1093 @item -mip2022ext
1094 Specifies that the extended IP2022 instructions are allowed.
1095
1096 @item -mip2022
1097 Restores the default behaviour, which restricts the permitted instructions to
1098 just the basic IP2022 ones.
1099
1100 @end table
1101 @end ifset
1102
1103 @ifset M32C
1104 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for the
1105 Renesas M32C and M16C processors.
1106
1107 @table @gcctabopt
1108
1109 @item -m32c
1110 Assemble M32C instructions.
1111
1112 @item -m16c
1113 Assemble M16C instructions (the default).
1114
1115 @item -relax
1116 Enable support for link-time relaxations.
1117
1118 @item -h-tick-hex
1119 Support H'00 style hex constants in addition to 0x00 style.
1120
1121 @end table
1122 @end ifset
1123
1124 @ifset M32R
1125 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for the
1126 Renesas M32R (formerly Mitsubishi M32R) series.
1127
1128 @table @gcctabopt
1129
1130 @item --m32rx
1131 Specify which processor in the M32R family is the target. The default
1132 is normally the M32R, but this option changes it to the M32RX.
1133
1134 @item --warn-explicit-parallel-conflicts or --Wp
1135 Produce warning messages when questionable parallel constructs are
1136 encountered.
1137
1138 @item --no-warn-explicit-parallel-conflicts or --Wnp
1139 Do not produce warning messages when questionable parallel constructs are
1140 encountered.
1141
1142 @end table
1143 @end ifset
1144
1145 @ifset M680X0
1146 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for the
1147 Motorola 68000 series.
1148
1149 @table @gcctabopt
1150
1151 @item -l
1152 Shorten references to undefined symbols, to one word instead of two.
1153
1154 @item -m68000 | -m68008 | -m68010 | -m68020 | -m68030
1155 @itemx | -m68040 | -m68060 | -m68302 | -m68331 | -m68332
1156 @itemx | -m68333 | -m68340 | -mcpu32 | -m5200
1157 Specify what processor in the 68000 family is the target. The default
1158 is normally the 68020, but this can be changed at configuration time.
1159
1160 @item -m68881 | -m68882 | -mno-68881 | -mno-68882
1161 The target machine does (or does not) have a floating-point coprocessor.
1162 The default is to assume a coprocessor for 68020, 68030, and cpu32. Although
1163 the basic 68000 is not compatible with the 68881, a combination of the
1164 two can be specified, since it's possible to do emulation of the
1165 coprocessor instructions with the main processor.
1166
1167 @item -m68851 | -mno-68851
1168 The target machine does (or does not) have a memory-management
1169 unit coprocessor. The default is to assume an MMU for 68020 and up.
1170
1171 @end table
1172 @end ifset
1173
1174 @ifset NIOSII
1175
1176 @ifclear man
1177 @xref{Nios II Options}, for the options available when @value{AS} is configured
1178 for an Altera Nios II processor.
1179 @end ifclear
1180
1181 @ifset man
1182 @c man begin OPTIONS
1183 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for an
1184 Altera Nios II processor.
1185 @c man end
1186 @c man begin INCLUDE
1187 @include c-nios2.texi
1188 @c ended inside the included file
1189 @end ifset
1190 @end ifset
1191
1192 @ifset PDP11
1193
1194 For details about the PDP-11 machine dependent features options,
1195 see @ref{PDP-11-Options}.
1196
1197 @table @gcctabopt
1198 @item -mpic | -mno-pic
1199 Generate position-independent (or position-dependent) code. The
1200 default is @option{-mpic}.
1201
1202 @item -mall
1203 @itemx -mall-extensions
1204 Enable all instruction set extensions. This is the default.
1205
1206 @item -mno-extensions
1207 Disable all instruction set extensions.
1208
1209 @item -m@var{extension} | -mno-@var{extension}
1210 Enable (or disable) a particular instruction set extension.
1211
1212 @item -m@var{cpu}
1213 Enable the instruction set extensions supported by a particular CPU, and
1214 disable all other extensions.
1215
1216 @item -m@var{machine}
1217 Enable the instruction set extensions supported by a particular machine
1218 model, and disable all other extensions.
1219 @end table
1220
1221 @end ifset
1222
1223 @ifset PJ
1224 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for
1225 a picoJava processor.
1226
1227 @table @gcctabopt
1228
1229 @cindex PJ endianness
1230 @cindex endianness, PJ
1231 @cindex big endian output, PJ
1232 @item -mb
1233 Generate ``big endian'' format output.
1234
1235 @cindex little endian output, PJ
1236 @item -ml
1237 Generate ``little endian'' format output.
1238
1239 @end table
1240 @end ifset
1241
1242 @ifset PRU
1243
1244 @ifclear man
1245 @xref{PRU Options}, for the options available when @value{AS} is configured
1246 for a PRU processor.
1247 @end ifclear
1248
1249 @ifset man
1250 @c man begin OPTIONS
1251 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for a
1252 PRU processor.
1253 @c man end
1254 @c man begin INCLUDE
1255 @include c-pru.texi
1256 @c ended inside the included file
1257 @end ifset
1258 @end ifset
1259
1260 @ifset M68HC11
1261 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for the
1262 Motorola 68HC11 or 68HC12 series.
1263
1264 @table @gcctabopt
1265
1266 @item -m68hc11 | -m68hc12 | -m68hcs12 | -mm9s12x | -mm9s12xg
1267 Specify what processor is the target. The default is
1268 defined by the configuration option when building the assembler.
1269
1270 @item --xgate-ramoffset
1271 Instruct the linker to offset RAM addresses from S12X address space into
1272 XGATE address space.
1273
1274 @item -mshort
1275 Specify to use the 16-bit integer ABI.
1276
1277 @item -mlong
1278 Specify to use the 32-bit integer ABI.
1279
1280 @item -mshort-double
1281 Specify to use the 32-bit double ABI.
1282
1283 @item -mlong-double
1284 Specify to use the 64-bit double ABI.
1285
1286 @item --force-long-branches
1287 Relative branches are turned into absolute ones. This concerns
1288 conditional branches, unconditional branches and branches to a
1289 sub routine.
1290
1291 @item -S | --short-branches
1292 Do not turn relative branches into absolute ones
1293 when the offset is out of range.
1294
1295 @item --strict-direct-mode
1296 Do not turn the direct addressing mode into extended addressing mode
1297 when the instruction does not support direct addressing mode.
1298
1299 @item --print-insn-syntax
1300 Print the syntax of instruction in case of error.
1301
1302 @item --print-opcodes
1303 Print the list of instructions with syntax and then exit.
1304
1305 @item --generate-example
1306 Print an example of instruction for each possible instruction and then exit.
1307 This option is only useful for testing @command{@value{AS}}.
1308
1309 @end table
1310 @end ifset
1311
1312 @ifset SPARC
1313 The following options are available when @command{@value{AS}} is configured
1314 for the SPARC architecture:
1315
1316 @table @gcctabopt
1317 @item -Av6 | -Av7 | -Av8 | -Asparclet | -Asparclite
1318 @itemx -Av8plus | -Av8plusa | -Av9 | -Av9a
1319 Explicitly select a variant of the SPARC architecture.
1320
1321 @samp{-Av8plus} and @samp{-Av8plusa} select a 32 bit environment.
1322 @samp{-Av9} and @samp{-Av9a} select a 64 bit environment.
1323
1324 @samp{-Av8plusa} and @samp{-Av9a} enable the SPARC V9 instruction set with
1325 UltraSPARC extensions.
1326
1327 @item -xarch=v8plus | -xarch=v8plusa
1328 For compatibility with the Solaris v9 assembler. These options are
1329 equivalent to -Av8plus and -Av8plusa, respectively.
1330
1331 @item -bump
1332 Warn when the assembler switches to another architecture.
1333 @end table
1334 @end ifset
1335
1336 @ifset TIC54X
1337 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for the 'c54x
1338 architecture.
1339
1340 @table @gcctabopt
1341 @item -mfar-mode
1342 Enable extended addressing mode. All addresses and relocations will assume
1343 extended addressing (usually 23 bits).
1344 @item -mcpu=@var{CPU_VERSION}
1345 Sets the CPU version being compiled for.
1346 @item -merrors-to-file @var{FILENAME}
1347 Redirect error output to a file, for broken systems which don't support such
1348 behaviour in the shell.
1349 @end table
1350 @end ifset
1351
1352 @ifset MIPS
1353 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for
1354 a MIPS processor.
1355
1356 @table @gcctabopt
1357 @item -G @var{num}
1358 This option sets the largest size of an object that can be referenced
1359 implicitly with the @code{gp} register. It is only accepted for targets that
1360 use ECOFF format, such as a DECstation running Ultrix. The default value is 8.
1361
1362 @cindex MIPS endianness
1363 @cindex endianness, MIPS
1364 @cindex big endian output, MIPS
1365 @item -EB
1366 Generate ``big endian'' format output.
1367
1368 @cindex little endian output, MIPS
1369 @item -EL
1370 Generate ``little endian'' format output.
1371
1372 @cindex MIPS ISA
1373 @item -mips1
1374 @itemx -mips2
1375 @itemx -mips3
1376 @itemx -mips4
1377 @itemx -mips5
1378 @itemx -mips32
1379 @itemx -mips32r2
1380 @itemx -mips32r3
1381 @itemx -mips32r5
1382 @itemx -mips32r6
1383 @itemx -mips64
1384 @itemx -mips64r2
1385 @itemx -mips64r3
1386 @itemx -mips64r5
1387 @itemx -mips64r6
1388 Generate code for a particular MIPS Instruction Set Architecture level.
1389 @samp{-mips1} is an alias for @samp{-march=r3000}, @samp{-mips2} is an
1390 alias for @samp{-march=r6000}, @samp{-mips3} is an alias for
1391 @samp{-march=r4000} and @samp{-mips4} is an alias for @samp{-march=r8000}.
1392 @samp{-mips5}, @samp{-mips32}, @samp{-mips32r2}, @samp{-mips32r3},
1393 @samp{-mips32r5}, @samp{-mips32r6}, @samp{-mips64}, @samp{-mips64r2},
1394 @samp{-mips64r3}, @samp{-mips64r5}, and @samp{-mips64r6} correspond to generic
1395 MIPS V, MIPS32, MIPS32 Release 2, MIPS32 Release 3, MIPS32 Release 5, MIPS32
1396 Release 6, MIPS64, MIPS64 Release 2, MIPS64 Release 3, MIPS64 Release 5, and
1397 MIPS64 Release 6 ISA processors, respectively.
1398
1399 @item -march=@var{cpu}
1400 Generate code for a particular MIPS CPU.
1401
1402 @item -mtune=@var{cpu}
1403 Schedule and tune for a particular MIPS CPU.
1404
1405 @item -mfix7000
1406 @itemx -mno-fix7000
1407 Cause nops to be inserted if the read of the destination register
1408 of an mfhi or mflo instruction occurs in the following two instructions.
1409
1410 @item -mfix-rm7000
1411 @itemx -mno-fix-rm7000
1412 Cause nops to be inserted if a dmult or dmultu instruction is
1413 followed by a load instruction.
1414
1415 @item -mdebug
1416 @itemx -no-mdebug
1417 Cause stabs-style debugging output to go into an ECOFF-style .mdebug
1418 section instead of the standard ELF .stabs sections.
1419
1420 @item -mpdr
1421 @itemx -mno-pdr
1422 Control generation of @code{.pdr} sections.
1423
1424 @item -mgp32
1425 @itemx -mfp32
1426 The register sizes are normally inferred from the ISA and ABI, but these
1427 flags force a certain group of registers to be treated as 32 bits wide at
1428 all times. @samp{-mgp32} controls the size of general-purpose registers
1429 and @samp{-mfp32} controls the size of floating-point registers.
1430
1431 @item -mgp64
1432 @itemx -mfp64
1433 The register sizes are normally inferred from the ISA and ABI, but these
1434 flags force a certain group of registers to be treated as 64 bits wide at
1435 all times. @samp{-mgp64} controls the size of general-purpose registers
1436 and @samp{-mfp64} controls the size of floating-point registers.
1437
1438 @item -mfpxx
1439 The register sizes are normally inferred from the ISA and ABI, but using
1440 this flag in combination with @samp{-mabi=32} enables an ABI variant
1441 which will operate correctly with floating-point registers which are
1442 32 or 64 bits wide.
1443
1444 @item -modd-spreg
1445 @itemx -mno-odd-spreg
1446 Enable use of floating-point operations on odd-numbered single-precision
1447 registers when supported by the ISA. @samp{-mfpxx} implies
1448 @samp{-mno-odd-spreg}, otherwise the default is @samp{-modd-spreg}.
1449
1450 @item -mips16
1451 @itemx -no-mips16
1452 Generate code for the MIPS 16 processor. This is equivalent to putting
1453 @code{.set mips16} at the start of the assembly file. @samp{-no-mips16}
1454 turns off this option.
1455
1456 @item -mmicromips
1457 @itemx -mno-micromips
1458 Generate code for the microMIPS processor. This is equivalent to putting
1459 @code{.set micromips} at the start of the assembly file. @samp{-mno-micromips}
1460 turns off this option. This is equivalent to putting @code{.set nomicromips}
1461 at the start of the assembly file.
1462
1463 @item -msmartmips
1464 @itemx -mno-smartmips
1465 Enables the SmartMIPS extension to the MIPS32 instruction set. This is
1466 equivalent to putting @code{.set smartmips} at the start of the assembly file.
1467 @samp{-mno-smartmips} turns off this option.
1468
1469 @item -mips3d
1470 @itemx -no-mips3d
1471 Generate code for the MIPS-3D Application Specific Extension.
1472 This tells the assembler to accept MIPS-3D instructions.
1473 @samp{-no-mips3d} turns off this option.
1474
1475 @item -mdmx
1476 @itemx -no-mdmx
1477 Generate code for the MDMX Application Specific Extension.
1478 This tells the assembler to accept MDMX instructions.
1479 @samp{-no-mdmx} turns off this option.
1480
1481 @item -mdsp
1482 @itemx -mno-dsp
1483 Generate code for the DSP Release 1 Application Specific Extension.
1484 This tells the assembler to accept DSP Release 1 instructions.
1485 @samp{-mno-dsp} turns off this option.
1486
1487 @item -mdspr2
1488 @itemx -mno-dspr2
1489 Generate code for the DSP Release 2 Application Specific Extension.
1490 This option implies @samp{-mdsp}.
1491 This tells the assembler to accept DSP Release 2 instructions.
1492 @samp{-mno-dspr2} turns off this option.
1493
1494 @item -mdspr3
1495 @itemx -mno-dspr3
1496 Generate code for the DSP Release 3 Application Specific Extension.
1497 This option implies @samp{-mdsp} and @samp{-mdspr2}.
1498 This tells the assembler to accept DSP Release 3 instructions.
1499 @samp{-mno-dspr3} turns off this option.
1500
1501 @item -mmsa
1502 @itemx -mno-msa
1503 Generate code for the MIPS SIMD Architecture Extension.
1504 This tells the assembler to accept MSA instructions.
1505 @samp{-mno-msa} turns off this option.
1506
1507 @item -mxpa
1508 @itemx -mno-xpa
1509 Generate code for the MIPS eXtended Physical Address (XPA) Extension.
1510 This tells the assembler to accept XPA instructions.
1511 @samp{-mno-xpa} turns off this option.
1512
1513 @item -mmt
1514 @itemx -mno-mt
1515 Generate code for the MT Application Specific Extension.
1516 This tells the assembler to accept MT instructions.
1517 @samp{-mno-mt} turns off this option.
1518
1519 @item -mmcu
1520 @itemx -mno-mcu
1521 Generate code for the MCU Application Specific Extension.
1522 This tells the assembler to accept MCU instructions.
1523 @samp{-mno-mcu} turns off this option.
1524
1525 @item -minsn32
1526 @itemx -mno-insn32
1527 Only use 32-bit instruction encodings when generating code for the
1528 microMIPS processor. This option inhibits the use of any 16-bit
1529 instructions. This is equivalent to putting @code{.set insn32} at
1530 the start of the assembly file. @samp{-mno-insn32} turns off this
1531 option. This is equivalent to putting @code{.set noinsn32} at the
1532 start of the assembly file. By default @samp{-mno-insn32} is
1533 selected, allowing all instructions to be used.
1534
1535 @item --construct-floats
1536 @itemx --no-construct-floats
1537 The @samp{--no-construct-floats} option disables the construction of
1538 double width floating point constants by loading the two halves of the
1539 value into the two single width floating point registers that make up
1540 the double width register. By default @samp{--construct-floats} is
1541 selected, allowing construction of these floating point constants.
1542
1543 @item --relax-branch
1544 @itemx --no-relax-branch
1545 The @samp{--relax-branch} option enables the relaxation of out-of-range
1546 branches. By default @samp{--no-relax-branch} is selected, causing any
1547 out-of-range branches to produce an error.
1548
1549 @item -mnan=@var{encoding}
1550 Select between the IEEE 754-2008 (@option{-mnan=2008}) or the legacy
1551 (@option{-mnan=legacy}) NaN encoding format. The latter is the default.
1552
1553 @cindex emulation
1554 @item --emulation=@var{name}
1555 This option was formerly used to switch between ELF and ECOFF output
1556 on targets like IRIX 5 that supported both. MIPS ECOFF support was
1557 removed in GAS 2.24, so the option now serves little purpose.
1558 It is retained for backwards compatibility.
1559
1560 The available configuration names are: @samp{mipself}, @samp{mipslelf} and
1561 @samp{mipsbelf}. Choosing @samp{mipself} now has no effect, since the output
1562 is always ELF. @samp{mipslelf} and @samp{mipsbelf} select little- and
1563 big-endian output respectively, but @samp{-EL} and @samp{-EB} are now the
1564 preferred options instead.
1565
1566 @item -nocpp
1567 @command{@value{AS}} ignores this option. It is accepted for compatibility with
1568 the native tools.
1569
1570 @item --trap
1571 @itemx --no-trap
1572 @itemx --break
1573 @itemx --no-break
1574 Control how to deal with multiplication overflow and division by zero.
1575 @samp{--trap} or @samp{--no-break} (which are synonyms) take a trap exception
1576 (and only work for Instruction Set Architecture level 2 and higher);
1577 @samp{--break} or @samp{--no-trap} (also synonyms, and the default) take a
1578 break exception.
1579
1580 @item -n
1581 When this option is used, @command{@value{AS}} will issue a warning every
1582 time it generates a nop instruction from a macro.
1583 @end table
1584 @end ifset
1585
1586 @ifset MCORE
1587 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for
1588 an MCore processor.
1589
1590 @table @gcctabopt
1591 @item -jsri2bsr
1592 @itemx -nojsri2bsr
1593 Enable or disable the JSRI to BSR transformation. By default this is enabled.
1594 The command line option @samp{-nojsri2bsr} can be used to disable it.
1595
1596 @item -sifilter
1597 @itemx -nosifilter
1598 Enable or disable the silicon filter behaviour. By default this is disabled.
1599 The default can be overridden by the @samp{-sifilter} command line option.
1600
1601 @item -relax
1602 Alter jump instructions for long displacements.
1603
1604 @item -mcpu=[210|340]
1605 Select the cpu type on the target hardware. This controls which instructions
1606 can be assembled.
1607
1608 @item -EB
1609 Assemble for a big endian target.
1610
1611 @item -EL
1612 Assemble for a little endian target.
1613
1614 @end table
1615 @end ifset
1616 @c man end
1617
1618 @ifset METAG
1619
1620 @ifclear man
1621 @xref{Meta Options}, for the options available when @value{AS} is configured
1622 for a Meta processor.
1623 @end ifclear
1624
1625 @ifset man
1626 @c man begin OPTIONS
1627 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for a
1628 Meta processor.
1629 @c man end
1630 @c man begin INCLUDE
1631 @include c-metag.texi
1632 @c ended inside the included file
1633 @end ifset
1634
1635 @end ifset
1636
1637 @c man begin OPTIONS
1638 @ifset MMIX
1639 See the info pages for documentation of the MMIX-specific options.
1640 @end ifset
1641
1642 @ifset NDS32
1643
1644 @ifclear man
1645 @xref{NDS32 Options}, for the options available when @value{AS} is configured
1646 for a NDS32 processor.
1647 @end ifclear
1648 @c ended inside the included file
1649 @end ifset
1650
1651 @ifset man
1652 @c man begin OPTIONS
1653 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for a
1654 NDS32 processor.
1655 @c man end
1656 @c man begin INCLUDE
1657 @include c-nds32.texi
1658 @c ended inside the included file
1659 @end ifset
1660
1661 @c man end
1662 @ifset PPC
1663
1664 @ifclear man
1665 @xref{PowerPC-Opts}, for the options available when @value{AS} is configured
1666 for a PowerPC processor.
1667 @end ifclear
1668
1669 @ifset man
1670 @c man begin OPTIONS
1671 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for a
1672 PowerPC processor.
1673 @c man end
1674 @c man begin INCLUDE
1675 @include c-ppc.texi
1676 @c ended inside the included file
1677 @end ifset
1678
1679 @end ifset
1680
1681 @ifset RISCV
1682
1683 @ifclear man
1684 @xref{RISC-V-Opts}, for the options available when @value{AS} is configured
1685 for a RISC-V processor.
1686 @end ifclear
1687
1688 @ifset man
1689 @c man begin OPTIONS
1690 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for a
1691 RISC-V processor.
1692 @c man end
1693 @c man begin INCLUDE
1694 @include c-riscv.texi
1695 @c ended inside the included file
1696 @end ifset
1697
1698 @end ifset
1699
1700 @c man begin OPTIONS
1701 @ifset RX
1702 See the info pages for documentation of the RX-specific options.
1703 @end ifset
1704
1705 @ifset S390
1706 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for the s390
1707 processor family.
1708
1709 @table @gcctabopt
1710 @item -m31
1711 @itemx -m64
1712 Select the word size, either 31/32 bits or 64 bits.
1713 @item -mesa
1714 @item -mzarch
1715 Select the architecture mode, either the Enterprise System
1716 Architecture (esa) or the z/Architecture mode (zarch).
1717 @item -march=@var{processor}
1718 Specify which s390 processor variant is the target, @samp{g5} (or
1719 @samp{arch3}), @samp{g6}, @samp{z900} (or @samp{arch5}), @samp{z990} (or
1720 @samp{arch6}), @samp{z9-109}, @samp{z9-ec} (or @samp{arch7}), @samp{z10} (or
1721 @samp{arch8}), @samp{z196} (or @samp{arch9}), @samp{zEC12} (or @samp{arch10}),
1722 or @samp{z13} (or @samp{arch11}).
1723 @item -mregnames
1724 @itemx -mno-regnames
1725 Allow or disallow symbolic names for registers.
1726 @item -mwarn-areg-zero
1727 Warn whenever the operand for a base or index register has been specified
1728 but evaluates to zero.
1729 @end table
1730 @end ifset
1731 @c man end
1732
1733 @ifset TIC6X
1734
1735 @ifclear man
1736 @xref{TIC6X Options}, for the options available when @value{AS} is configured
1737 for a TMS320C6000 processor.
1738 @end ifclear
1739
1740 @ifset man
1741 @c man begin OPTIONS
1742 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for a
1743 TMS320C6000 processor.
1744 @c man end
1745 @c man begin INCLUDE
1746 @include c-tic6x.texi
1747 @c ended inside the included file
1748 @end ifset
1749
1750 @end ifset
1751
1752 @ifset TILEGX
1753
1754 @ifclear man
1755 @xref{TILE-Gx Options}, for the options available when @value{AS} is configured
1756 for a TILE-Gx processor.
1757 @end ifclear
1758
1759 @ifset man
1760 @c man begin OPTIONS
1761 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for a TILE-Gx
1762 processor.
1763 @c man end
1764 @c man begin INCLUDE
1765 @include c-tilegx.texi
1766 @c ended inside the included file
1767 @end ifset
1768
1769 @end ifset
1770
1771 @ifset VISIUM
1772
1773 @ifclear man
1774 @xref{Visium Options}, for the options available when @value{AS} is configured
1775 for a Visium processor.
1776 @end ifclear
1777
1778 @ifset man
1779 @c man begin OPTIONS
1780 The following option is available when @value{AS} is configured for a Visium
1781 processor.
1782 @c man end
1783 @c man begin INCLUDE
1784 @include c-visium.texi
1785 @c ended inside the included file
1786 @end ifset
1787
1788 @end ifset
1789
1790 @ifset XTENSA
1791
1792 @ifclear man
1793 @xref{Xtensa Options}, for the options available when @value{AS} is configured
1794 for an Xtensa processor.
1795 @end ifclear
1796
1797 @ifset man
1798 @c man begin OPTIONS
1799 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for an
1800 Xtensa processor.
1801 @c man end
1802 @c man begin INCLUDE
1803 @include c-xtensa.texi
1804 @c ended inside the included file
1805 @end ifset
1806
1807 @end ifset
1808
1809 @c man begin OPTIONS
1810
1811 @ifset Z80
1812 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for
1813 a Z80 family processor.
1814 @table @gcctabopt
1815 @item -z80
1816 Assemble for Z80 processor.
1817 @item -r800
1818 Assemble for R800 processor.
1819 @item -ignore-undocumented-instructions
1820 @itemx -Wnud
1821 Assemble undocumented Z80 instructions that also work on R800 without warning.
1822 @item -ignore-unportable-instructions
1823 @itemx -Wnup
1824 Assemble all undocumented Z80 instructions without warning.
1825 @item -warn-undocumented-instructions
1826 @itemx -Wud
1827 Issue a warning for undocumented Z80 instructions that also work on R800.
1828 @item -warn-unportable-instructions
1829 @itemx -Wup
1830 Issue a warning for undocumented Z80 instructions that do not work on R800.
1831 @item -forbid-undocumented-instructions
1832 @itemx -Fud
1833 Treat all undocumented instructions as errors.
1834 @item -forbid-unportable-instructions
1835 @itemx -Fup
1836 Treat undocumented Z80 instructions that do not work on R800 as errors.
1837 @end table
1838 @end ifset
1839
1840 @c man end
1841
1842 @menu
1843 * Manual:: Structure of this Manual
1844 * GNU Assembler:: The GNU Assembler
1845 * Object Formats:: Object File Formats
1846 * Command Line:: Command Line
1847 * Input Files:: Input Files
1848 * Object:: Output (Object) File
1849 * Errors:: Error and Warning Messages
1850 @end menu
1851
1852 @node Manual
1853 @section Structure of this Manual
1854
1855 @cindex manual, structure and purpose
1856 This manual is intended to describe what you need to know to use
1857 @sc{gnu} @command{@value{AS}}. We cover the syntax expected in source files, including
1858 notation for symbols, constants, and expressions; the directives that
1859 @command{@value{AS}} understands; and of course how to invoke @command{@value{AS}}.
1860
1861 @ifclear GENERIC
1862 We also cover special features in the @value{TARGET}
1863 configuration of @command{@value{AS}}, including assembler directives.
1864 @end ifclear
1865 @ifset GENERIC
1866 This manual also describes some of the machine-dependent features of
1867 various flavors of the assembler.
1868 @end ifset
1869
1870 @cindex machine instructions (not covered)
1871 On the other hand, this manual is @emph{not} intended as an introduction
1872 to programming in assembly language---let alone programming in general!
1873 In a similar vein, we make no attempt to introduce the machine
1874 architecture; we do @emph{not} describe the instruction set, standard
1875 mnemonics, registers or addressing modes that are standard to a
1876 particular architecture.
1877 @ifset GENERIC
1878 You may want to consult the manufacturer's
1879 machine architecture manual for this information.
1880 @end ifset
1881 @ifclear GENERIC
1882 @ifset H8/300
1883 For information on the H8/300 machine instruction set, see @cite{H8/300
1884 Series Programming Manual}. For the H8/300H, see @cite{H8/300H Series
1885 Programming Manual} (Renesas).
1886 @end ifset
1887 @ifset SH
1888 For information on the Renesas (formerly Hitachi) / SuperH SH machine instruction set,
1889 see @cite{SH-Microcomputer User's Manual} (Renesas) or
1890 @cite{SH-4 32-bit CPU Core Architecture} (SuperH) and
1891 @cite{SuperH (SH) 64-Bit RISC Series} (SuperH).
1892 @end ifset
1893 @ifset Z8000
1894 For information on the Z8000 machine instruction set, see @cite{Z8000 CPU Technical Manual}
1895 @end ifset
1896 @end ifclear
1897
1898 @c I think this is premature---doc@cygnus.com, 17jan1991
1899 @ignore
1900 Throughout this manual, we assume that you are running @dfn{GNU},
1901 the portable operating system from the @dfn{Free Software
1902 Foundation, Inc.}. This restricts our attention to certain kinds of
1903 computer (in particular, the kinds of computers that @sc{gnu} can run on);
1904 once this assumption is granted examples and definitions need less
1905 qualification.
1906
1907 @command{@value{AS}} is part of a team of programs that turn a high-level
1908 human-readable series of instructions into a low-level
1909 computer-readable series of instructions. Different versions of
1910 @command{@value{AS}} are used for different kinds of computer.
1911 @end ignore
1912
1913 @c There used to be a section "Terminology" here, which defined
1914 @c "contents", "byte", "word", and "long". Defining "word" to any
1915 @c particular size is confusing when the .word directive may generate 16
1916 @c bits on one machine and 32 bits on another; in general, for the user
1917 @c version of this manual, none of these terms seem essential to define.
1918 @c They were used very little even in the former draft of the manual;
1919 @c this draft makes an effort to avoid them (except in names of
1920 @c directives).
1921
1922 @node GNU Assembler
1923 @section The GNU Assembler
1924
1925 @c man begin DESCRIPTION
1926
1927 @sc{gnu} @command{as} is really a family of assemblers.
1928 @ifclear GENERIC
1929 This manual describes @command{@value{AS}}, a member of that family which is
1930 configured for the @value{TARGET} architectures.
1931 @end ifclear
1932 If you use (or have used) the @sc{gnu} assembler on one architecture, you
1933 should find a fairly similar environment when you use it on another
1934 architecture. Each version has much in common with the others,
1935 including object file formats, most assembler directives (often called
1936 @dfn{pseudo-ops}) and assembler syntax.@refill
1937
1938 @cindex purpose of @sc{gnu} assembler
1939 @command{@value{AS}} is primarily intended to assemble the output of the
1940 @sc{gnu} C compiler @code{@value{GCC}} for use by the linker
1941 @code{@value{LD}}. Nevertheless, we've tried to make @command{@value{AS}}
1942 assemble correctly everything that other assemblers for the same
1943 machine would assemble.
1944 @ifset VAX
1945 Any exceptions are documented explicitly (@pxref{Machine Dependencies}).
1946 @end ifset
1947 @ifset M680X0
1948 @c This remark should appear in generic version of manual; assumption
1949 @c here is that generic version sets M680x0.
1950 This doesn't mean @command{@value{AS}} always uses the same syntax as another
1951 assembler for the same architecture; for example, we know of several
1952 incompatible versions of 680x0 assembly language syntax.
1953 @end ifset
1954
1955 @c man end
1956
1957 Unlike older assemblers, @command{@value{AS}} is designed to assemble a source
1958 program in one pass of the source file. This has a subtle impact on the
1959 @kbd{.org} directive (@pxref{Org,,@code{.org}}).
1960
1961 @node Object Formats
1962 @section Object File Formats
1963
1964 @cindex object file format
1965 The @sc{gnu} assembler can be configured to produce several alternative
1966 object file formats. For the most part, this does not affect how you
1967 write assembly language programs; but directives for debugging symbols
1968 are typically different in different file formats. @xref{Symbol
1969 Attributes,,Symbol Attributes}.
1970 @ifclear GENERIC
1971 @ifclear MULTI-OBJ
1972 For the @value{TARGET} target, @command{@value{AS}} is configured to produce
1973 @value{OBJ-NAME} format object files.
1974 @end ifclear
1975 @c The following should exhaust all configs that set MULTI-OBJ, ideally
1976 @ifset I960
1977 On the @value{TARGET}, @command{@value{AS}} can be configured to produce either
1978 @code{b.out} or COFF format object files.
1979 @end ifset
1980 @ifset HPPA
1981 On the @value{TARGET}, @command{@value{AS}} can be configured to produce either
1982 SOM or ELF format object files.
1983 @end ifset
1984 @end ifclear
1985
1986 @node Command Line
1987 @section Command Line
1988
1989 @cindex command line conventions
1990
1991 After the program name @command{@value{AS}}, the command line may contain
1992 options and file names. Options may appear in any order, and may be
1993 before, after, or between file names. The order of file names is
1994 significant.
1995
1996 @cindex standard input, as input file
1997 @kindex --
1998 @file{--} (two hyphens) by itself names the standard input file
1999 explicitly, as one of the files for @command{@value{AS}} to assemble.
2000
2001 @cindex options, command line
2002 Except for @samp{--} any command line argument that begins with a
2003 hyphen (@samp{-}) is an option. Each option changes the behavior of
2004 @command{@value{AS}}. No option changes the way another option works. An
2005 option is a @samp{-} followed by one or more letters; the case of
2006 the letter is important. All options are optional.
2007
2008 Some options expect exactly one file name to follow them. The file
2009 name may either immediately follow the option's letter (compatible
2010 with older assemblers) or it may be the next command argument (@sc{gnu}
2011 standard). These two command lines are equivalent:
2012
2013 @smallexample
2014 @value{AS} -o my-object-file.o mumble.s
2015 @value{AS} -omy-object-file.o mumble.s
2016 @end smallexample
2017
2018 @node Input Files
2019 @section Input Files
2020
2021 @cindex input
2022 @cindex source program
2023 @cindex files, input
2024 We use the phrase @dfn{source program}, abbreviated @dfn{source}, to
2025 describe the program input to one run of @command{@value{AS}}. The program may
2026 be in one or more files; how the source is partitioned into files
2027 doesn't change the meaning of the source.
2028
2029 @c I added "con" prefix to "catenation" just to prove I can overcome my
2030 @c APL training... doc@cygnus.com
2031 The source program is a concatenation of the text in all the files, in the
2032 order specified.
2033
2034 @c man begin DESCRIPTION
2035 Each time you run @command{@value{AS}} it assembles exactly one source
2036 program. The source program is made up of one or more files.
2037 (The standard input is also a file.)
2038
2039 You give @command{@value{AS}} a command line that has zero or more input file
2040 names. The input files are read (from left file name to right). A
2041 command line argument (in any position) that has no special meaning
2042 is taken to be an input file name.
2043
2044 If you give @command{@value{AS}} no file names it attempts to read one input file
2045 from the @command{@value{AS}} standard input, which is normally your terminal. You
2046 may have to type @key{ctl-D} to tell @command{@value{AS}} there is no more program
2047 to assemble.
2048
2049 Use @samp{--} if you need to explicitly name the standard input file
2050 in your command line.
2051
2052 If the source is empty, @command{@value{AS}} produces a small, empty object
2053 file.
2054
2055 @c man end
2056
2057 @subheading Filenames and Line-numbers
2058
2059 @cindex input file linenumbers
2060 @cindex line numbers, in input files
2061 There are two ways of locating a line in the input file (or files) and
2062 either may be used in reporting error messages. One way refers to a line
2063 number in a physical file; the other refers to a line number in a
2064 ``logical'' file. @xref{Errors, ,Error and Warning Messages}.
2065
2066 @dfn{Physical files} are those files named in the command line given
2067 to @command{@value{AS}}.
2068
2069 @dfn{Logical files} are simply names declared explicitly by assembler
2070 directives; they bear no relation to physical files. Logical file names help
2071 error messages reflect the original source file, when @command{@value{AS}} source
2072 is itself synthesized from other files. @command{@value{AS}} understands the
2073 @samp{#} directives emitted by the @code{@value{GCC}} preprocessor. See also
2074 @ref{File,,@code{.file}}.
2075
2076 @node Object
2077 @section Output (Object) File
2078
2079 @cindex object file
2080 @cindex output file
2081 @kindex a.out
2082 @kindex .o
2083 Every time you run @command{@value{AS}} it produces an output file, which is
2084 your assembly language program translated into numbers. This file
2085 is the object file. Its default name is
2086 @ifclear BOUT
2087 @code{a.out}.
2088 @end ifclear
2089 @ifset BOUT
2090 @ifset GENERIC
2091 @code{a.out}, or
2092 @end ifset
2093 @code{b.out} when @command{@value{AS}} is configured for the Intel 80960.
2094 @end ifset
2095 You can give it another name by using the @option{-o} option. Conventionally,
2096 object file names end with @file{.o}. The default name is used for historical
2097 reasons: older assemblers were capable of assembling self-contained programs
2098 directly into a runnable program. (For some formats, this isn't currently
2099 possible, but it can be done for the @code{a.out} format.)
2100
2101 @cindex linker
2102 @kindex ld
2103 The object file is meant for input to the linker @code{@value{LD}}. It contains
2104 assembled program code, information to help @code{@value{LD}} integrate
2105 the assembled program into a runnable file, and (optionally) symbolic
2106 information for the debugger.
2107
2108 @c link above to some info file(s) like the description of a.out.
2109 @c don't forget to describe @sc{gnu} info as well as Unix lossage.
2110
2111 @node Errors
2112 @section Error and Warning Messages
2113
2114 @c man begin DESCRIPTION
2115
2116 @cindex error messages
2117 @cindex warning messages
2118 @cindex messages from assembler
2119 @command{@value{AS}} may write warnings and error messages to the standard error
2120 file (usually your terminal). This should not happen when a compiler
2121 runs @command{@value{AS}} automatically. Warnings report an assumption made so
2122 that @command{@value{AS}} could keep assembling a flawed program; errors report a
2123 grave problem that stops the assembly.
2124
2125 @c man end
2126
2127 @cindex format of warning messages
2128 Warning messages have the format
2129
2130 @smallexample
2131 file_name:@b{NNN}:Warning Message Text
2132 @end smallexample
2133
2134 @noindent
2135 @cindex file names and line numbers, in warnings/errors
2136 (where @b{NNN} is a line number). If both a logical file name
2137 (@pxref{File,,@code{.file}}) and a logical line number
2138 @ifset GENERIC
2139 (@pxref{Line,,@code{.line}})
2140 @end ifset
2141 have been given then they will be used, otherwise the file name and line number
2142 in the current assembler source file will be used. The message text is
2143 intended to be self explanatory (in the grand Unix tradition).
2144
2145 Note the file name must be set via the logical version of the @code{.file}
2146 directive, not the DWARF2 version of the @code{.file} directive. For example:
2147
2148 @smallexample
2149 .file 2 "bar.c"
2150 error_assembler_source
2151 .file "foo.c"
2152 .line 30
2153 error_c_source
2154 @end smallexample
2155
2156 produces this output:
2157
2158 @smallexample
2159 Assembler messages:
2160 asm.s:2: Error: no such instruction: `error_assembler_source'
2161 foo.c:31: Error: no such instruction: `error_c_source'
2162 @end smallexample
2163
2164 @cindex format of error messages
2165 Error messages have the format
2166
2167 @smallexample
2168 file_name:@b{NNN}:FATAL:Error Message Text
2169 @end smallexample
2170
2171 The file name and line number are derived as for warning
2172 messages. The actual message text may be rather less explanatory
2173 because many of them aren't supposed to happen.
2174
2175 @node Invoking
2176 @chapter Command-Line Options
2177
2178 @cindex options, all versions of assembler
2179 This chapter describes command-line options available in @emph{all}
2180 versions of the @sc{gnu} assembler; see @ref{Machine Dependencies},
2181 for options specific
2182 @ifclear GENERIC
2183 to the @value{TARGET} target.
2184 @end ifclear
2185 @ifset GENERIC
2186 to particular machine architectures.
2187 @end ifset
2188
2189 @c man begin DESCRIPTION
2190
2191 If you are invoking @command{@value{AS}} via the @sc{gnu} C compiler,
2192 you can use the @samp{-Wa} option to pass arguments through to the assembler.
2193 The assembler arguments must be separated from each other (and the @samp{-Wa})
2194 by commas. For example:
2195
2196 @smallexample
2197 gcc -c -g -O -Wa,-alh,-L file.c
2198 @end smallexample
2199
2200 @noindent
2201 This passes two options to the assembler: @samp{-alh} (emit a listing to
2202 standard output with high-level and assembly source) and @samp{-L} (retain
2203 local symbols in the symbol table).
2204
2205 Usually you do not need to use this @samp{-Wa} mechanism, since many compiler
2206 command-line options are automatically passed to the assembler by the compiler.
2207 (You can call the @sc{gnu} compiler driver with the @samp{-v} option to see
2208 precisely what options it passes to each compilation pass, including the
2209 assembler.)
2210
2211 @c man end
2212
2213 @menu
2214 * a:: -a[cdghlns] enable listings
2215 * alternate:: --alternate enable alternate macro syntax
2216 * D:: -D for compatibility
2217 * f:: -f to work faster
2218 * I:: -I for .include search path
2219 @ifclear DIFF-TBL-KLUGE
2220 * K:: -K for compatibility
2221 @end ifclear
2222 @ifset DIFF-TBL-KLUGE
2223 * K:: -K for difference tables
2224 @end ifset
2225
2226 * L:: -L to retain local symbols
2227 * listing:: --listing-XXX to configure listing output
2228 * M:: -M or --mri to assemble in MRI compatibility mode
2229 * MD:: --MD for dependency tracking
2230 * no-pad-sections:: --no-pad-sections to stop section padding
2231 * o:: -o to name the object file
2232 * R:: -R to join data and text sections
2233 * statistics:: --statistics to see statistics about assembly
2234 * traditional-format:: --traditional-format for compatible output
2235 * v:: -v to announce version
2236 * W:: -W, --no-warn, --warn, --fatal-warnings to control warnings
2237 * Z:: -Z to make object file even after errors
2238 @end menu
2239
2240 @node a
2241 @section Enable Listings: @option{-a[cdghlns]}
2242
2243 @kindex -a
2244 @kindex -ac
2245 @kindex -ad
2246 @kindex -ag
2247 @kindex -ah
2248 @kindex -al
2249 @kindex -an
2250 @kindex -as
2251 @cindex listings, enabling
2252 @cindex assembly listings, enabling
2253
2254 These options enable listing output from the assembler. By itself,
2255 @samp{-a} requests high-level, assembly, and symbols listing.
2256 You can use other letters to select specific options for the list:
2257 @samp{-ah} requests a high-level language listing,
2258 @samp{-al} requests an output-program assembly listing, and
2259 @samp{-as} requests a symbol table listing.
2260 High-level listings require that a compiler debugging option like
2261 @samp{-g} be used, and that assembly listings (@samp{-al}) be requested
2262 also.
2263
2264 Use the @samp{-ag} option to print a first section with general assembly
2265 information, like @value{AS} version, switches passed, or time stamp.
2266
2267 Use the @samp{-ac} option to omit false conditionals from a listing. Any lines
2268 which are not assembled because of a false @code{.if} (or @code{.ifdef}, or any
2269 other conditional), or a true @code{.if} followed by an @code{.else}, will be
2270 omitted from the listing.
2271
2272 Use the @samp{-ad} option to omit debugging directives from the
2273 listing.
2274
2275 Once you have specified one of these options, you can further control
2276 listing output and its appearance using the directives @code{.list},
2277 @code{.nolist}, @code{.psize}, @code{.eject}, @code{.title}, and
2278 @code{.sbttl}.
2279 The @samp{-an} option turns off all forms processing.
2280 If you do not request listing output with one of the @samp{-a} options, the
2281 listing-control directives have no effect.
2282
2283 The letters after @samp{-a} may be combined into one option,
2284 @emph{e.g.}, @samp{-aln}.
2285
2286 Note if the assembler source is coming from the standard input (e.g.,
2287 because it
2288 is being created by @code{@value{GCC}} and the @samp{-pipe} command line switch
2289 is being used) then the listing will not contain any comments or preprocessor
2290 directives. This is because the listing code buffers input source lines from
2291 stdin only after they have been preprocessed by the assembler. This reduces
2292 memory usage and makes the code more efficient.
2293
2294 @node alternate
2295 @section @option{--alternate}
2296
2297 @kindex --alternate
2298 Begin in alternate macro mode, see @ref{Altmacro,,@code{.altmacro}}.
2299
2300 @node D
2301 @section @option{-D}
2302
2303 @kindex -D
2304 This option has no effect whatsoever, but it is accepted to make it more
2305 likely that scripts written for other assemblers also work with
2306 @command{@value{AS}}.
2307
2308 @node f
2309 @section Work Faster: @option{-f}
2310
2311 @kindex -f
2312 @cindex trusted compiler
2313 @cindex faster processing (@option{-f})
2314 @samp{-f} should only be used when assembling programs written by a
2315 (trusted) compiler. @samp{-f} stops the assembler from doing whitespace
2316 and comment preprocessing on
2317 the input file(s) before assembling them. @xref{Preprocessing,
2318 ,Preprocessing}.
2319
2320 @quotation
2321 @emph{Warning:} if you use @samp{-f} when the files actually need to be
2322 preprocessed (if they contain comments, for example), @command{@value{AS}} does
2323 not work correctly.
2324 @end quotation
2325
2326 @node I
2327 @section @code{.include} Search Path: @option{-I} @var{path}
2328
2329 @kindex -I @var{path}
2330 @cindex paths for @code{.include}
2331 @cindex search path for @code{.include}
2332 @cindex @code{include} directive search path
2333 Use this option to add a @var{path} to the list of directories
2334 @command{@value{AS}} searches for files specified in @code{.include}
2335 directives (@pxref{Include,,@code{.include}}). You may use @option{-I} as
2336 many times as necessary to include a variety of paths. The current
2337 working directory is always searched first; after that, @command{@value{AS}}
2338 searches any @samp{-I} directories in the same order as they were
2339 specified (left to right) on the command line.
2340
2341 @node K
2342 @section Difference Tables: @option{-K}
2343
2344 @kindex -K
2345 @ifclear DIFF-TBL-KLUGE
2346 On the @value{TARGET} family, this option is allowed, but has no effect. It is
2347 permitted for compatibility with the @sc{gnu} assembler on other platforms,
2348 where it can be used to warn when the assembler alters the machine code
2349 generated for @samp{.word} directives in difference tables. The @value{TARGET}
2350 family does not have the addressing limitations that sometimes lead to this
2351 alteration on other platforms.
2352 @end ifclear
2353
2354 @ifset DIFF-TBL-KLUGE
2355 @cindex difference tables, warning
2356 @cindex warning for altered difference tables
2357 @command{@value{AS}} sometimes alters the code emitted for directives of the
2358 form @samp{.word @var{sym1}-@var{sym2}}. @xref{Word,,@code{.word}}.
2359 You can use the @samp{-K} option if you want a warning issued when this
2360 is done.
2361 @end ifset
2362
2363 @node L
2364 @section Include Local Symbols: @option{-L}
2365
2366 @kindex -L
2367 @cindex local symbols, retaining in output
2368 Symbols beginning with system-specific local label prefixes, typically
2369 @samp{.L} for ELF systems or @samp{L} for traditional a.out systems, are
2370 called @dfn{local symbols}. @xref{Symbol Names}. Normally you do not see
2371 such symbols when debugging, because they are intended for the use of
2372 programs (like compilers) that compose assembler programs, not for your
2373 notice. Normally both @command{@value{AS}} and @code{@value{LD}} discard
2374 such symbols, so you do not normally debug with them.
2375
2376 This option tells @command{@value{AS}} to retain those local symbols
2377 in the object file. Usually if you do this you also tell the linker
2378 @code{@value{LD}} to preserve those symbols.
2379
2380 @node listing
2381 @section Configuring listing output: @option{--listing}
2382
2383 The listing feature of the assembler can be enabled via the command line switch
2384 @samp{-a} (@pxref{a}). This feature combines the input source file(s) with a
2385 hex dump of the corresponding locations in the output object file, and displays
2386 them as a listing file. The format of this listing can be controlled by
2387 directives inside the assembler source (i.e., @code{.list} (@pxref{List}),
2388 @code{.title} (@pxref{Title}), @code{.sbttl} (@pxref{Sbttl}),
2389 @code{.psize} (@pxref{Psize}), and
2390 @code{.eject} (@pxref{Eject}) and also by the following switches:
2391
2392 @table @gcctabopt
2393 @item --listing-lhs-width=@samp{number}
2394 @kindex --listing-lhs-width
2395 @cindex Width of first line disassembly output
2396 Sets the maximum width, in words, of the first line of the hex byte dump. This
2397 dump appears on the left hand side of the listing output.
2398
2399 @item --listing-lhs-width2=@samp{number}
2400 @kindex --listing-lhs-width2
2401 @cindex Width of continuation lines of disassembly output
2402 Sets the maximum width, in words, of any further lines of the hex byte dump for
2403 a given input source line. If this value is not specified, it defaults to being
2404 the same as the value specified for @samp{--listing-lhs-width}. If neither
2405 switch is used the default is to one.
2406
2407 @item --listing-rhs-width=@samp{number}
2408 @kindex --listing-rhs-width
2409 @cindex Width of source line output
2410 Sets the maximum width, in characters, of the source line that is displayed
2411 alongside the hex dump. The default value for this parameter is 100. The
2412 source line is displayed on the right hand side of the listing output.
2413
2414 @item --listing-cont-lines=@samp{number}
2415 @kindex --listing-cont-lines
2416 @cindex Maximum number of continuation lines
2417 Sets the maximum number of continuation lines of hex dump that will be
2418 displayed for a given single line of source input. The default value is 4.
2419 @end table
2420
2421 @node M
2422 @section Assemble in MRI Compatibility Mode: @option{-M}
2423
2424 @kindex -M
2425 @cindex MRI compatibility mode
2426 The @option{-M} or @option{--mri} option selects MRI compatibility mode. This
2427 changes the syntax and pseudo-op handling of @command{@value{AS}} to make it
2428 compatible with the @code{ASM68K} or the @code{ASM960} (depending upon the
2429 configured target) assembler from Microtec Research. The exact nature of the
2430 MRI syntax will not be documented here; see the MRI manuals for more
2431 information. Note in particular that the handling of macros and macro
2432 arguments is somewhat different. The purpose of this option is to permit
2433 assembling existing MRI assembler code using @command{@value{AS}}.
2434
2435 The MRI compatibility is not complete. Certain operations of the MRI assembler
2436 depend upon its object file format, and can not be supported using other object
2437 file formats. Supporting these would require enhancing each object file format
2438 individually. These are:
2439
2440 @itemize @bullet
2441 @item global symbols in common section
2442
2443 The m68k MRI assembler supports common sections which are merged by the linker.
2444 Other object file formats do not support this. @command{@value{AS}} handles
2445 common sections by treating them as a single common symbol. It permits local
2446 symbols to be defined within a common section, but it can not support global
2447 symbols, since it has no way to describe them.
2448
2449 @item complex relocations
2450
2451 The MRI assemblers support relocations against a negated section address, and
2452 relocations which combine the start addresses of two or more sections. These
2453 are not support by other object file formats.
2454
2455 @item @code{END} pseudo-op specifying start address
2456
2457 The MRI @code{END} pseudo-op permits the specification of a start address.
2458 This is not supported by other object file formats. The start address may
2459 instead be specified using the @option{-e} option to the linker, or in a linker
2460 script.
2461
2462 @item @code{IDNT}, @code{.ident} and @code{NAME} pseudo-ops
2463
2464 The MRI @code{IDNT}, @code{.ident} and @code{NAME} pseudo-ops assign a module
2465 name to the output file. This is not supported by other object file formats.
2466
2467 @item @code{ORG} pseudo-op
2468
2469 The m68k MRI @code{ORG} pseudo-op begins an absolute section at a given
2470 address. This differs from the usual @command{@value{AS}} @code{.org} pseudo-op,
2471 which changes the location within the current section. Absolute sections are
2472 not supported by other object file formats. The address of a section may be
2473 assigned within a linker script.
2474 @end itemize
2475
2476 There are some other features of the MRI assembler which are not supported by
2477 @command{@value{AS}}, typically either because they are difficult or because they
2478 seem of little consequence. Some of these may be supported in future releases.
2479
2480 @itemize @bullet
2481
2482 @item EBCDIC strings
2483
2484 EBCDIC strings are not supported.
2485
2486 @item packed binary coded decimal
2487
2488 Packed binary coded decimal is not supported. This means that the @code{DC.P}
2489 and @code{DCB.P} pseudo-ops are not supported.
2490
2491 @item @code{FEQU} pseudo-op
2492
2493 The m68k @code{FEQU} pseudo-op is not supported.
2494
2495 @item @code{NOOBJ} pseudo-op
2496
2497 The m68k @code{NOOBJ} pseudo-op is not supported.
2498
2499 @item @code{OPT} branch control options
2500
2501 The m68k @code{OPT} branch control options---@code{B}, @code{BRS}, @code{BRB},
2502 @code{BRL}, and @code{BRW}---are ignored. @command{@value{AS}} automatically
2503 relaxes all branches, whether forward or backward, to an appropriate size, so
2504 these options serve no purpose.
2505
2506 @item @code{OPT} list control options
2507
2508 The following m68k @code{OPT} list control options are ignored: @code{C},
2509 @code{CEX}, @code{CL}, @code{CRE}, @code{E}, @code{G}, @code{I}, @code{M},
2510 @code{MEX}, @code{MC}, @code{MD}, @code{X}.
2511
2512 @item other @code{OPT} options
2513
2514 The following m68k @code{OPT} options are ignored: @code{NEST}, @code{O},
2515 @code{OLD}, @code{OP}, @code{P}, @code{PCO}, @code{PCR}, @code{PCS}, @code{R}.
2516
2517 @item @code{OPT} @code{D} option is default
2518
2519 The m68k @code{OPT} @code{D} option is the default, unlike the MRI assembler.
2520 @code{OPT NOD} may be used to turn it off.
2521
2522 @item @code{XREF} pseudo-op.
2523
2524 The m68k @code{XREF} pseudo-op is ignored.
2525
2526 @item @code{.debug} pseudo-op
2527
2528 The i960 @code{.debug} pseudo-op is not supported.
2529
2530 @item @code{.extended} pseudo-op
2531
2532 The i960 @code{.extended} pseudo-op is not supported.
2533
2534 @item @code{.list} pseudo-op.
2535
2536 The various options of the i960 @code{.list} pseudo-op are not supported.
2537
2538 @item @code{.optimize} pseudo-op
2539
2540 The i960 @code{.optimize} pseudo-op is not supported.
2541
2542 @item @code{.output} pseudo-op
2543
2544 The i960 @code{.output} pseudo-op is not supported.
2545
2546 @item @code{.setreal} pseudo-op
2547
2548 The i960 @code{.setreal} pseudo-op is not supported.
2549
2550 @end itemize
2551
2552 @node MD
2553 @section Dependency Tracking: @option{--MD}
2554
2555 @kindex --MD
2556 @cindex dependency tracking
2557 @cindex make rules
2558
2559 @command{@value{AS}} can generate a dependency file for the file it creates. This
2560 file consists of a single rule suitable for @code{make} describing the
2561 dependencies of the main source file.
2562
2563 The rule is written to the file named in its argument.
2564
2565 This feature is used in the automatic updating of makefiles.
2566
2567 @node no-pad-sections
2568 @section Output Section Padding
2569 @kindex --no-pad-sections
2570 @cindex output section padding
2571 Normally the assembler will pad the end of each output section up to its
2572 alignment boundary. But this can waste space, which can be significant on
2573 memory constrained targets. So the @option{--no-pad-sections} option will
2574 disable this behaviour.
2575
2576 @node o
2577 @section Name the Object File: @option{-o}
2578
2579 @kindex -o
2580 @cindex naming object file
2581 @cindex object file name
2582 There is always one object file output when you run @command{@value{AS}}. By
2583 default it has the name
2584 @ifset GENERIC
2585 @ifset I960
2586 @file{a.out} (or @file{b.out}, for Intel 960 targets only).
2587 @end ifset
2588 @ifclear I960
2589 @file{a.out}.
2590 @end ifclear
2591 @end ifset
2592 @ifclear GENERIC
2593 @ifset I960
2594 @file{b.out}.
2595 @end ifset
2596 @ifclear I960
2597 @file{a.out}.
2598 @end ifclear
2599 @end ifclear
2600 You use this option (which takes exactly one filename) to give the
2601 object file a different name.
2602
2603 Whatever the object file is called, @command{@value{AS}} overwrites any
2604 existing file of the same name.
2605
2606 @node R
2607 @section Join Data and Text Sections: @option{-R}
2608
2609 @kindex -R
2610 @cindex data and text sections, joining
2611 @cindex text and data sections, joining
2612 @cindex joining text and data sections
2613 @cindex merging text and data sections
2614 @option{-R} tells @command{@value{AS}} to write the object file as if all
2615 data-section data lives in the text section. This is only done at
2616 the very last moment: your binary data are the same, but data
2617 section parts are relocated differently. The data section part of
2618 your object file is zero bytes long because all its bytes are
2619 appended to the text section. (@xref{Sections,,Sections and Relocation}.)
2620
2621 When you specify @option{-R} it would be possible to generate shorter
2622 address displacements (because we do not have to cross between text and
2623 data section). We refrain from doing this simply for compatibility with
2624 older versions of @command{@value{AS}}. In future, @option{-R} may work this way.
2625
2626 @ifset COFF-ELF
2627 When @command{@value{AS}} is configured for COFF or ELF output,
2628 this option is only useful if you use sections named @samp{.text} and
2629 @samp{.data}.
2630 @end ifset
2631
2632 @ifset HPPA
2633 @option{-R} is not supported for any of the HPPA targets. Using
2634 @option{-R} generates a warning from @command{@value{AS}}.
2635 @end ifset
2636
2637 @node statistics
2638 @section Display Assembly Statistics: @option{--statistics}
2639
2640 @kindex --statistics
2641 @cindex statistics, about assembly
2642 @cindex time, total for assembly
2643 @cindex space used, maximum for assembly
2644 Use @samp{--statistics} to display two statistics about the resources used by
2645 @command{@value{AS}}: the maximum amount of space allocated during the assembly
2646 (in bytes), and the total execution time taken for the assembly (in @sc{cpu}
2647 seconds).
2648
2649 @node traditional-format
2650 @section Compatible Output: @option{--traditional-format}
2651
2652 @kindex --traditional-format
2653 For some targets, the output of @command{@value{AS}} is different in some ways
2654 from the output of some existing assembler. This switch requests
2655 @command{@value{AS}} to use the traditional format instead.
2656
2657 For example, it disables the exception frame optimizations which
2658 @command{@value{AS}} normally does by default on @code{@value{GCC}} output.
2659
2660 @node v
2661 @section Announce Version: @option{-v}
2662
2663 @kindex -v
2664 @kindex -version
2665 @cindex assembler version
2666 @cindex version of assembler
2667 You can find out what version of as is running by including the
2668 option @samp{-v} (which you can also spell as @samp{-version}) on the
2669 command line.
2670
2671 @node W
2672 @section Control Warnings: @option{-W}, @option{--warn}, @option{--no-warn}, @option{--fatal-warnings}
2673
2674 @command{@value{AS}} should never give a warning or error message when
2675 assembling compiler output. But programs written by people often
2676 cause @command{@value{AS}} to give a warning that a particular assumption was
2677 made. All such warnings are directed to the standard error file.
2678
2679 @kindex -W
2680 @kindex --no-warn
2681 @cindex suppressing warnings
2682 @cindex warnings, suppressing
2683 If you use the @option{-W} and @option{--no-warn} options, no warnings are issued.
2684 This only affects the warning messages: it does not change any particular of
2685 how @command{@value{AS}} assembles your file. Errors, which stop the assembly,
2686 are still reported.
2687
2688 @kindex --fatal-warnings
2689 @cindex errors, caused by warnings
2690 @cindex warnings, causing error
2691 If you use the @option{--fatal-warnings} option, @command{@value{AS}} considers
2692 files that generate warnings to be in error.
2693
2694 @kindex --warn
2695 @cindex warnings, switching on
2696 You can switch these options off again by specifying @option{--warn}, which
2697 causes warnings to be output as usual.
2698
2699 @node Z
2700 @section Generate Object File in Spite of Errors: @option{-Z}
2701 @cindex object file, after errors
2702 @cindex errors, continuing after
2703 After an error message, @command{@value{AS}} normally produces no output. If for
2704 some reason you are interested in object file output even after
2705 @command{@value{AS}} gives an error message on your program, use the @samp{-Z}
2706 option. If there are any errors, @command{@value{AS}} continues anyways, and
2707 writes an object file after a final warning message of the form @samp{@var{n}
2708 errors, @var{m} warnings, generating bad object file.}
2709
2710 @node Syntax
2711 @chapter Syntax
2712
2713 @cindex machine-independent syntax
2714 @cindex syntax, machine-independent
2715 This chapter describes the machine-independent syntax allowed in a
2716 source file. @command{@value{AS}} syntax is similar to what many other
2717 assemblers use; it is inspired by the BSD 4.2
2718 @ifclear VAX
2719 assembler.
2720 @end ifclear
2721 @ifset VAX
2722 assembler, except that @command{@value{AS}} does not assemble Vax bit-fields.
2723 @end ifset
2724
2725 @menu
2726 * Preprocessing:: Preprocessing
2727 * Whitespace:: Whitespace
2728 * Comments:: Comments
2729 * Symbol Intro:: Symbols
2730 * Statements:: Statements
2731 * Constants:: Constants
2732 @end menu
2733
2734 @node Preprocessing
2735 @section Preprocessing
2736
2737 @cindex preprocessing
2738 The @command{@value{AS}} internal preprocessor:
2739 @itemize @bullet
2740 @cindex whitespace, removed by preprocessor
2741 @item
2742 adjusts and removes extra whitespace. It leaves one space or tab before
2743 the keywords on a line, and turns any other whitespace on the line into
2744 a single space.
2745
2746 @cindex comments, removed by preprocessor
2747 @item
2748 removes all comments, replacing them with a single space, or an
2749 appropriate number of newlines.
2750
2751 @cindex constants, converted by preprocessor
2752 @item
2753 converts character constants into the appropriate numeric values.
2754 @end itemize
2755
2756 It does not do macro processing, include file handling, or
2757 anything else you may get from your C compiler's preprocessor. You can
2758 do include file processing with the @code{.include} directive
2759 (@pxref{Include,,@code{.include}}). You can use the @sc{gnu} C compiler driver
2760 to get other ``CPP'' style preprocessing by giving the input file a
2761 @samp{.S} suffix. @xref{Overall Options, ,Options Controlling the Kind of
2762 Output, gcc info, Using GNU CC}.
2763
2764 Excess whitespace, comments, and character constants
2765 cannot be used in the portions of the input text that are not
2766 preprocessed.
2767
2768 @cindex turning preprocessing on and off
2769 @cindex preprocessing, turning on and off
2770 @kindex #NO_APP
2771 @kindex #APP
2772 If the first line of an input file is @code{#NO_APP} or if you use the
2773 @samp{-f} option, whitespace and comments are not removed from the input file.
2774 Within an input file, you can ask for whitespace and comment removal in
2775 specific portions of the by putting a line that says @code{#APP} before the
2776 text that may contain whitespace or comments, and putting a line that says
2777 @code{#NO_APP} after this text. This feature is mainly intend to support
2778 @code{asm} statements in compilers whose output is otherwise free of comments
2779 and whitespace.
2780
2781 @node Whitespace
2782 @section Whitespace
2783
2784 @cindex whitespace
2785 @dfn{Whitespace} is one or more blanks or tabs, in any order.
2786 Whitespace is used to separate symbols, and to make programs neater for
2787 people to read. Unless within character constants
2788 (@pxref{Characters,,Character Constants}), any whitespace means the same
2789 as exactly one space.
2790
2791 @node Comments
2792 @section Comments
2793
2794 @cindex comments
2795 There are two ways of rendering comments to @command{@value{AS}}. In both
2796 cases the comment is equivalent to one space.
2797
2798 Anything from @samp{/*} through the next @samp{*/} is a comment.
2799 This means you may not nest these comments.
2800
2801 @smallexample
2802 /*
2803 The only way to include a newline ('\n') in a comment
2804 is to use this sort of comment.
2805 */
2806
2807 /* This sort of comment does not nest. */
2808 @end smallexample
2809
2810 @cindex line comment character
2811 Anything from a @dfn{line comment} character up to the next newline is
2812 considered a comment and is ignored. The line comment character is target
2813 specific, and some targets multiple comment characters. Some targets also have
2814 line comment characters that only work if they are the first character on a
2815 line. Some targets use a sequence of two characters to introduce a line
2816 comment. Some targets can also change their line comment characters depending
2817 upon command line options that have been used. For more details see the
2818 @emph{Syntax} section in the documentation for individual targets.
2819
2820 If the line comment character is the hash sign (@samp{#}) then it still has the
2821 special ability to enable and disable preprocessing (@pxref{Preprocessing}) and
2822 to specify logical line numbers:
2823
2824 @kindex #
2825 @cindex lines starting with @code{#}
2826 @cindex logical line numbers
2827 To be compatible with past assemblers, lines that begin with @samp{#} have a
2828 special interpretation. Following the @samp{#} should be an absolute
2829 expression (@pxref{Expressions}): the logical line number of the @emph{next}
2830 line. Then a string (@pxref{Strings, ,Strings}) is allowed: if present it is a
2831 new logical file name. The rest of the line, if any, should be whitespace.
2832
2833 If the first non-whitespace characters on the line are not numeric,
2834 the line is ignored. (Just like a comment.)
2835
2836 @smallexample
2837 # This is an ordinary comment.
2838 # 42-6 "new_file_name" # New logical file name
2839 # This is logical line # 36.
2840 @end smallexample
2841 This feature is deprecated, and may disappear from future versions
2842 of @command{@value{AS}}.
2843
2844 @node Symbol Intro
2845 @section Symbols
2846
2847 @cindex characters used in symbols
2848 @ifclear SPECIAL-SYMS
2849 A @dfn{symbol} is one or more characters chosen from the set of all
2850 letters (both upper and lower case), digits and the three characters
2851 @samp{_.$}.
2852 @end ifclear
2853 @ifset SPECIAL-SYMS
2854 @ifclear GENERIC
2855 @ifset H8
2856 A @dfn{symbol} is one or more characters chosen from the set of all
2857 letters (both upper and lower case), digits and the three characters
2858 @samp{._$}. (Save that, on the H8/300 only, you may not use @samp{$} in
2859 symbol names.)
2860 @end ifset
2861 @end ifclear
2862 @end ifset
2863 @ifset GENERIC
2864 On most machines, you can also use @code{$} in symbol names; exceptions
2865 are noted in @ref{Machine Dependencies}.
2866 @end ifset
2867 No symbol may begin with a digit. Case is significant.
2868 There is no length limit; all characters are significant. Multibyte characters
2869 are supported. Symbols are delimited by characters not in that set, or by the
2870 beginning of a file (since the source program must end with a newline, the end
2871 of a file is not a possible symbol delimiter). @xref{Symbols}.
2872
2873 Symbol names may also be enclosed in double quote @code{"} characters. In such
2874 cases any characters are allowed, except for the NUL character. If a double
2875 quote character is to be included in the symbol name it must be preceeded by a
2876 backslash @code{\} character.
2877 @cindex length of symbols
2878
2879 @node Statements
2880 @section Statements
2881
2882 @cindex statements, structure of
2883 @cindex line separator character
2884 @cindex statement separator character
2885
2886 A @dfn{statement} ends at a newline character (@samp{\n}) or a
2887 @dfn{line separator character}. The line separator character is target
2888 specific and described in the @emph{Syntax} section of each
2889 target's documentation. Not all targets support a line separator character.
2890 The newline or line separator character is considered to be part of the
2891 preceding statement. Newlines and separators within character constants are an
2892 exception: they do not end statements.
2893
2894 @cindex newline, required at file end
2895 @cindex EOF, newline must precede
2896 It is an error to end any statement with end-of-file: the last
2897 character of any input file should be a newline.@refill
2898
2899 An empty statement is allowed, and may include whitespace. It is ignored.
2900
2901 @cindex instructions and directives
2902 @cindex directives and instructions
2903 @c "key symbol" is not used elsewhere in the document; seems pedantic to
2904 @c @defn{} it in that case, as was done previously... doc@cygnus.com,
2905 @c 13feb91.
2906 A statement begins with zero or more labels, optionally followed by a
2907 key symbol which determines what kind of statement it is. The key
2908 symbol determines the syntax of the rest of the statement. If the
2909 symbol begins with a dot @samp{.} then the statement is an assembler
2910 directive: typically valid for any computer. If the symbol begins with
2911 a letter the statement is an assembly language @dfn{instruction}: it
2912 assembles into a machine language instruction.
2913 @ifset GENERIC
2914 Different versions of @command{@value{AS}} for different computers
2915 recognize different instructions. In fact, the same symbol may
2916 represent a different instruction in a different computer's assembly
2917 language.@refill
2918 @end ifset
2919
2920 @cindex @code{:} (label)
2921 @cindex label (@code{:})
2922 A label is a symbol immediately followed by a colon (@code{:}).
2923 Whitespace before a label or after a colon is permitted, but you may not
2924 have whitespace between a label's symbol and its colon. @xref{Labels}.
2925
2926 @ifset HPPA
2927 For HPPA targets, labels need not be immediately followed by a colon, but
2928 the definition of a label must begin in column zero. This also implies that
2929 only one label may be defined on each line.
2930 @end ifset
2931
2932 @smallexample
2933 label: .directive followed by something
2934 another_label: # This is an empty statement.
2935 instruction operand_1, operand_2, @dots{}
2936 @end smallexample
2937
2938 @node Constants
2939 @section Constants
2940
2941 @cindex constants
2942 A constant is a number, written so that its value is known by
2943 inspection, without knowing any context. Like this:
2944 @smallexample
2945 @group
2946 .byte 74, 0112, 092, 0x4A, 0X4a, 'J, '\J # All the same value.
2947 .ascii "Ring the bell\7" # A string constant.
2948 .octa 0x123456789abcdef0123456789ABCDEF0 # A bignum.
2949 .float 0f-314159265358979323846264338327\
2950 95028841971.693993751E-40 # - pi, a flonum.
2951 @end group
2952 @end smallexample
2953
2954 @menu
2955 * Characters:: Character Constants
2956 * Numbers:: Number Constants
2957 @end menu
2958
2959 @node Characters
2960 @subsection Character Constants
2961
2962 @cindex character constants
2963 @cindex constants, character
2964 There are two kinds of character constants. A @dfn{character} stands
2965 for one character in one byte and its value may be used in
2966 numeric expressions. String constants (properly called string
2967 @emph{literals}) are potentially many bytes and their values may not be
2968 used in arithmetic expressions.
2969
2970 @menu
2971 * Strings:: Strings
2972 * Chars:: Characters
2973 @end menu
2974
2975 @node Strings
2976 @subsubsection Strings
2977
2978 @cindex string constants
2979 @cindex constants, string
2980 A @dfn{string} is written between double-quotes. It may contain
2981 double-quotes or null characters. The way to get special characters
2982 into a string is to @dfn{escape} these characters: precede them with
2983 a backslash @samp{\} character. For example @samp{\\} represents
2984 one backslash: the first @code{\} is an escape which tells
2985 @command{@value{AS}} to interpret the second character literally as a backslash
2986 (which prevents @command{@value{AS}} from recognizing the second @code{\} as an
2987 escape character). The complete list of escapes follows.
2988
2989 @cindex escape codes, character
2990 @cindex character escape codes
2991 @c NOTE: Cindex entries must not start with a backlash character.
2992 @c NOTE: This confuses the pdf2texi script when it is creating the
2993 @c NOTE: index based upon the first character and so it generates:
2994 @c NOTE: \initial {\\}
2995 @c NOTE: which then results in the error message:
2996 @c NOTE: Argument of \\ has an extra }.
2997 @c NOTE: So in the index entries below a space character has been
2998 @c NOTE: prepended to avoid this problem.
2999 @table @kbd
3000 @c @item \a
3001 @c Mnemonic for ACKnowledge; for ASCII this is octal code 007.
3002 @c
3003 @cindex @code{ \b} (backspace character)
3004 @cindex backspace (@code{\b})
3005 @item \b
3006 Mnemonic for backspace; for ASCII this is octal code 010.
3007
3008 @c @item \e
3009 @c Mnemonic for EOText; for ASCII this is octal code 004.
3010 @c
3011 @cindex @code{ \f} (formfeed character)
3012 @cindex formfeed (@code{\f})
3013 @item backslash-f
3014 Mnemonic for FormFeed; for ASCII this is octal code 014.
3015
3016 @cindex @code{ \n} (newline character)
3017 @cindex newline (@code{\n})
3018 @item \n
3019 Mnemonic for newline; for ASCII this is octal code 012.
3020
3021 @c @item \p
3022 @c Mnemonic for prefix; for ASCII this is octal code 033, usually known as @code{escape}.
3023 @c
3024 @cindex @code{ \r} (carriage return character)
3025 @cindex carriage return (@code{backslash-r})
3026 @item \r
3027 Mnemonic for carriage-Return; for ASCII this is octal code 015.
3028
3029 @c @item \s
3030 @c Mnemonic for space; for ASCII this is octal code 040. Included for compliance with
3031 @c other assemblers.
3032 @c
3033 @cindex @code{ \t} (tab)
3034 @cindex tab (@code{\t})
3035 @item \t
3036 Mnemonic for horizontal Tab; for ASCII this is octal code 011.
3037
3038 @c @item \v
3039 @c Mnemonic for Vertical tab; for ASCII this is octal code 013.
3040 @c @item \x @var{digit} @var{digit} @var{digit}
3041 @c A hexadecimal character code. The numeric code is 3 hexadecimal digits.
3042 @c
3043 @cindex @code{ \@var{ddd}} (octal character code)
3044 @cindex octal character code (@code{\@var{ddd}})
3045 @item \ @var{digit} @var{digit} @var{digit}
3046 An octal character code. The numeric code is 3 octal digits.
3047 For compatibility with other Unix systems, 8 and 9 are accepted as digits:
3048 for example, @code{\008} has the value 010, and @code{\009} the value 011.
3049
3050 @cindex @code{ \@var{xd...}} (hex character code)
3051 @cindex hex character code (@code{\@var{xd...}})
3052 @item \@code{x} @var{hex-digits...}
3053 A hex character code. All trailing hex digits are combined. Either upper or
3054 lower case @code{x} works.
3055
3056 @cindex @code{ \\} (@samp{\} character)
3057 @cindex backslash (@code{\\})
3058 @item \\
3059 Represents one @samp{\} character.
3060
3061 @c @item \'
3062 @c Represents one @samp{'} (accent acute) character.
3063 @c This is needed in single character literals
3064 @c (@xref{Characters,,Character Constants}.) to represent
3065 @c a @samp{'}.
3066 @c
3067 @cindex @code{ \"} (doublequote character)
3068 @cindex doublequote (@code{\"})
3069 @item \"
3070 Represents one @samp{"} character. Needed in strings to represent
3071 this character, because an unescaped @samp{"} would end the string.
3072
3073 @item \ @var{anything-else}
3074 Any other character when escaped by @kbd{\} gives a warning, but
3075 assembles as if the @samp{\} was not present. The idea is that if
3076 you used an escape sequence you clearly didn't want the literal
3077 interpretation of the following character. However @command{@value{AS}} has no
3078 other interpretation, so @command{@value{AS}} knows it is giving you the wrong
3079 code and warns you of the fact.
3080 @end table
3081
3082 Which characters are escapable, and what those escapes represent,
3083 varies widely among assemblers. The current set is what we think
3084 the BSD 4.2 assembler recognizes, and is a subset of what most C
3085 compilers recognize. If you are in doubt, do not use an escape
3086 sequence.
3087
3088 @node Chars
3089 @subsubsection Characters
3090
3091 @cindex single character constant
3092 @cindex character, single
3093 @cindex constant, single character
3094 A single character may be written as a single quote immediately followed by
3095 that character. Some backslash escapes apply to characters, @code{\b},
3096 @code{\f}, @code{\n}, @code{\r}, @code{\t}, and @code{\"} with the same meaning
3097 as for strings, plus @code{\'} for a single quote. So if you want to write the
3098 character backslash, you must write @kbd{'\\} where the first @code{\} escapes
3099 the second @code{\}. As you can see, the quote is an acute accent, not a grave
3100 accent. A newline
3101 @ifclear GENERIC
3102 @ifclear abnormal-separator
3103 (or semicolon @samp{;})
3104 @end ifclear
3105 @ifset abnormal-separator
3106 @ifset H8
3107 (or dollar sign @samp{$}, for the H8/300; or semicolon @samp{;} for the
3108 Renesas SH)
3109 @end ifset
3110 @end ifset
3111 @end ifclear
3112 immediately following an acute accent is taken as a literal character
3113 and does not count as the end of a statement. The value of a character
3114 constant in a numeric expression is the machine's byte-wide code for
3115 that character. @command{@value{AS}} assumes your character code is ASCII:
3116 @kbd{'A} means 65, @kbd{'B} means 66, and so on. @refill
3117
3118 @node Numbers
3119 @subsection Number Constants
3120
3121 @cindex constants, number
3122 @cindex number constants
3123 @command{@value{AS}} distinguishes three kinds of numbers according to how they
3124 are stored in the target machine. @emph{Integers} are numbers that
3125 would fit into an @code{int} in the C language. @emph{Bignums} are
3126 integers, but they are stored in more than 32 bits. @emph{Flonums}
3127 are floating point numbers, described below.
3128
3129 @menu
3130 * Integers:: Integers
3131 * Bignums:: Bignums
3132 * Flonums:: Flonums
3133 @ifclear GENERIC
3134 @ifset I960
3135 * Bit Fields:: Bit Fields
3136 @end ifset
3137 @end ifclear
3138 @end menu
3139
3140 @node Integers
3141 @subsubsection Integers
3142 @cindex integers
3143 @cindex constants, integer
3144
3145 @cindex binary integers
3146 @cindex integers, binary
3147 A binary integer is @samp{0b} or @samp{0B} followed by zero or more of
3148 the binary digits @samp{01}.
3149
3150 @cindex octal integers
3151 @cindex integers, octal
3152 An octal integer is @samp{0} followed by zero or more of the octal
3153 digits (@samp{01234567}).
3154
3155 @cindex decimal integers
3156 @cindex integers, decimal
3157 A decimal integer starts with a non-zero digit followed by zero or
3158 more digits (@samp{0123456789}).
3159
3160 @cindex hexadecimal integers
3161 @cindex integers, hexadecimal
3162 A hexadecimal integer is @samp{0x} or @samp{0X} followed by one or
3163 more hexadecimal digits chosen from @samp{0123456789abcdefABCDEF}.
3164
3165 Integers have the usual values. To denote a negative integer, use
3166 the prefix operator @samp{-} discussed under expressions
3167 (@pxref{Prefix Ops,,Prefix Operators}).
3168
3169 @node Bignums
3170 @subsubsection Bignums
3171
3172 @cindex bignums
3173 @cindex constants, bignum
3174 A @dfn{bignum} has the same syntax and semantics as an integer
3175 except that the number (or its negative) takes more than 32 bits to
3176 represent in binary. The distinction is made because in some places
3177 integers are permitted while bignums are not.
3178
3179 @node Flonums
3180 @subsubsection Flonums
3181 @cindex flonums
3182 @cindex floating point numbers
3183 @cindex constants, floating point
3184
3185 @cindex precision, floating point
3186 A @dfn{flonum} represents a floating point number. The translation is
3187 indirect: a decimal floating point number from the text is converted by
3188 @command{@value{AS}} to a generic binary floating point number of more than
3189 sufficient precision. This generic floating point number is converted
3190 to a particular computer's floating point format (or formats) by a
3191 portion of @command{@value{AS}} specialized to that computer.
3192
3193 A flonum is written by writing (in order)
3194 @itemize @bullet
3195 @item
3196 The digit @samp{0}.
3197 @ifset HPPA
3198 (@samp{0} is optional on the HPPA.)
3199 @end ifset
3200
3201 @item
3202 A letter, to tell @command{@value{AS}} the rest of the number is a flonum.
3203 @ifset GENERIC
3204 @kbd{e} is recommended. Case is not important.
3205 @ignore
3206 @c FIXME: verify if flonum syntax really this vague for most cases
3207 (Any otherwise illegal letter works here, but that might be changed. Vax BSD
3208 4.2 assembler seems to allow any of @samp{defghDEFGH}.)
3209 @end ignore
3210
3211 On the H8/300, Renesas / SuperH SH,
3212 and AMD 29K architectures, the letter must be
3213 one of the letters @samp{DFPRSX} (in upper or lower case).
3214
3215 On the ARC, the letter must be one of the letters @samp{DFRS}
3216 (in upper or lower case).
3217
3218 On the Intel 960 architecture, the letter must be
3219 one of the letters @samp{DFT} (in upper or lower case).
3220
3221 On the HPPA architecture, the letter must be @samp{E} (upper case only).
3222 @end ifset
3223 @ifclear GENERIC
3224 @ifset ARC
3225 One of the letters @samp{DFRS} (in upper or lower case).
3226 @end ifset
3227 @ifset H8
3228 One of the letters @samp{DFPRSX} (in upper or lower case).
3229 @end ifset
3230 @ifset HPPA
3231 The letter @samp{E} (upper case only).
3232 @end ifset
3233 @ifset I960
3234 One of the letters @samp{DFT} (in upper or lower case).
3235 @end ifset
3236 @end ifclear
3237
3238 @item
3239 An optional sign: either @samp{+} or @samp{-}.
3240
3241 @item
3242 An optional @dfn{integer part}: zero or more decimal digits.
3243
3244 @item
3245 An optional @dfn{fractional part}: @samp{.} followed by zero
3246 or more decimal digits.
3247
3248 @item
3249 An optional exponent, consisting of:
3250
3251 @itemize @bullet
3252 @item
3253 An @samp{E} or @samp{e}.
3254 @c I can't find a config where "EXP_CHARS" is other than 'eE', but in
3255 @c principle this can perfectly well be different on different targets.
3256 @item
3257 Optional sign: either @samp{+} or @samp{-}.
3258 @item
3259 One or more decimal digits.
3260 @end itemize
3261
3262 @end itemize
3263
3264 At least one of the integer part or the fractional part must be
3265 present. The floating point number has the usual base-10 value.
3266
3267 @command{@value{AS}} does all processing using integers. Flonums are computed
3268 independently of any floating point hardware in the computer running
3269 @command{@value{AS}}.
3270
3271 @ifclear GENERIC
3272 @ifset I960
3273 @c Bit fields are written as a general facility but are also controlled
3274 @c by a conditional-compilation flag---which is as of now (21mar91)
3275 @c turned on only by the i960 config of GAS.
3276 @node Bit Fields
3277 @subsubsection Bit Fields
3278
3279 @cindex bit fields
3280 @cindex constants, bit field
3281 You can also define numeric constants as @dfn{bit fields}.
3282 Specify two numbers separated by a colon---
3283 @example
3284 @var{mask}:@var{value}
3285 @end example
3286 @noindent
3287 @command{@value{AS}} applies a bitwise @sc{and} between @var{mask} and
3288 @var{value}.
3289
3290 The resulting number is then packed
3291 @ifset GENERIC
3292 @c this conditional paren in case bit fields turned on elsewhere than 960
3293 (in host-dependent byte order)
3294 @end ifset
3295 into a field whose width depends on which assembler directive has the
3296 bit-field as its argument. Overflow (a result from the bitwise and
3297 requiring more binary digits to represent) is not an error; instead,
3298 more constants are generated, of the specified width, beginning with the
3299 least significant digits.@refill
3300
3301 The directives @code{.byte}, @code{.hword}, @code{.int}, @code{.long},
3302 @code{.short}, and @code{.word} accept bit-field arguments.
3303 @end ifset
3304 @end ifclear
3305
3306 @node Sections
3307 @chapter Sections and Relocation
3308 @cindex sections
3309 @cindex relocation
3310
3311 @menu
3312 * Secs Background:: Background
3313 * Ld Sections:: Linker Sections
3314 * As Sections:: Assembler Internal Sections
3315 * Sub-Sections:: Sub-Sections
3316 * bss:: bss Section
3317 @end menu
3318
3319 @node Secs Background
3320 @section Background
3321
3322 Roughly, a section is a range of addresses, with no gaps; all data
3323 ``in'' those addresses is treated the same for some particular purpose.
3324 For example there may be a ``read only'' section.
3325
3326 @cindex linker, and assembler
3327 @cindex assembler, and linker
3328 The linker @code{@value{LD}} reads many object files (partial programs) and
3329 combines their contents to form a runnable program. When @command{@value{AS}}
3330 emits an object file, the partial program is assumed to start at address 0.
3331 @code{@value{LD}} assigns the final addresses for the partial program, so that
3332 different partial programs do not overlap. This is actually an
3333 oversimplification, but it suffices to explain how @command{@value{AS}} uses
3334 sections.
3335
3336 @code{@value{LD}} moves blocks of bytes of your program to their run-time
3337 addresses. These blocks slide to their run-time addresses as rigid
3338 units; their length does not change and neither does the order of bytes
3339 within them. Such a rigid unit is called a @emph{section}. Assigning
3340 run-time addresses to sections is called @dfn{relocation}. It includes
3341 the task of adjusting mentions of object-file addresses so they refer to
3342 the proper run-time addresses.
3343 @ifset H8
3344 For the H8/300, and for the Renesas / SuperH SH,
3345 @command{@value{AS}} pads sections if needed to
3346 ensure they end on a word (sixteen bit) boundary.
3347 @end ifset
3348
3349 @cindex standard assembler sections
3350 An object file written by @command{@value{AS}} has at least three sections, any
3351 of which may be empty. These are named @dfn{text}, @dfn{data} and
3352 @dfn{bss} sections.
3353
3354 @ifset COFF-ELF
3355 @ifset GENERIC
3356 When it generates COFF or ELF output,
3357 @end ifset
3358 @command{@value{AS}} can also generate whatever other named sections you specify
3359 using the @samp{.section} directive (@pxref{Section,,@code{.section}}).
3360 If you do not use any directives that place output in the @samp{.text}
3361 or @samp{.data} sections, these sections still exist, but are empty.
3362 @end ifset
3363
3364 @ifset HPPA
3365 @ifset GENERIC
3366 When @command{@value{AS}} generates SOM or ELF output for the HPPA,
3367 @end ifset
3368 @command{@value{AS}} can also generate whatever other named sections you
3369 specify using the @samp{.space} and @samp{.subspace} directives. See
3370 @cite{HP9000 Series 800 Assembly Language Reference Manual}
3371 (HP 92432-90001) for details on the @samp{.space} and @samp{.subspace}
3372 assembler directives.
3373
3374 @ifset SOM
3375 Additionally, @command{@value{AS}} uses different names for the standard
3376 text, data, and bss sections when generating SOM output. Program text
3377 is placed into the @samp{$CODE$} section, data into @samp{$DATA$}, and
3378 BSS into @samp{$BSS$}.
3379 @end ifset
3380 @end ifset
3381
3382 Within the object file, the text section starts at address @code{0}, the
3383 data section follows, and the bss section follows the data section.
3384
3385 @ifset HPPA
3386 When generating either SOM or ELF output files on the HPPA, the text
3387 section starts at address @code{0}, the data section at address
3388 @code{0x4000000}, and the bss section follows the data section.
3389 @end ifset
3390
3391 To let @code{@value{LD}} know which data changes when the sections are
3392 relocated, and how to change that data, @command{@value{AS}} also writes to the
3393 object file details of the relocation needed. To perform relocation
3394 @code{@value{LD}} must know, each time an address in the object
3395 file is mentioned:
3396 @itemize @bullet
3397 @item
3398 Where in the object file is the beginning of this reference to
3399 an address?
3400 @item
3401 How long (in bytes) is this reference?
3402 @item
3403 Which section does the address refer to? What is the numeric value of
3404 @display
3405 (@var{address}) @minus{} (@var{start-address of section})?
3406 @end display
3407 @item
3408 Is the reference to an address ``Program-Counter relative''?
3409 @end itemize
3410
3411 @cindex addresses, format of
3412 @cindex section-relative addressing
3413 In fact, every address @command{@value{AS}} ever uses is expressed as
3414 @display
3415 (@var{section}) + (@var{offset into section})
3416 @end display
3417 @noindent
3418 Further, most expressions @command{@value{AS}} computes have this section-relative
3419 nature.
3420 @ifset SOM
3421 (For some object formats, such as SOM for the HPPA, some expressions are
3422 symbol-relative instead.)
3423 @end ifset
3424
3425 In this manual we use the notation @{@var{secname} @var{N}@} to mean ``offset
3426 @var{N} into section @var{secname}.''
3427
3428 Apart from text, data and bss sections you need to know about the
3429 @dfn{absolute} section. When @code{@value{LD}} mixes partial programs,
3430 addresses in the absolute section remain unchanged. For example, address
3431 @code{@{absolute 0@}} is ``relocated'' to run-time address 0 by
3432 @code{@value{LD}}. Although the linker never arranges two partial programs'
3433 data sections with overlapping addresses after linking, @emph{by definition}
3434 their absolute sections must overlap. Address @code{@{absolute@ 239@}} in one
3435 part of a program is always the same address when the program is running as
3436 address @code{@{absolute@ 239@}} in any other part of the program.
3437
3438 The idea of sections is extended to the @dfn{undefined} section. Any
3439 address whose section is unknown at assembly time is by definition
3440 rendered @{undefined @var{U}@}---where @var{U} is filled in later.
3441 Since numbers are always defined, the only way to generate an undefined
3442 address is to mention an undefined symbol. A reference to a named
3443 common block would be such a symbol: its value is unknown at assembly
3444 time so it has section @emph{undefined}.
3445
3446 By analogy the word @emph{section} is used to describe groups of sections in
3447 the linked program. @code{@value{LD}} puts all partial programs' text
3448 sections in contiguous addresses in the linked program. It is
3449 customary to refer to the @emph{text section} of a program, meaning all
3450 the addresses of all partial programs' text sections. Likewise for
3451 data and bss sections.
3452
3453 Some sections are manipulated by @code{@value{LD}}; others are invented for
3454 use of @command{@value{AS}} and have no meaning except during assembly.
3455
3456 @node Ld Sections
3457 @section Linker Sections
3458 @code{@value{LD}} deals with just four kinds of sections, summarized below.
3459
3460 @table @strong
3461
3462 @ifset COFF-ELF
3463 @cindex named sections
3464 @cindex sections, named
3465 @item named sections
3466 @end ifset
3467 @ifset aout-bout
3468 @cindex text section
3469 @cindex data section
3470 @itemx text section
3471 @itemx data section
3472 @end ifset
3473 These sections hold your program. @command{@value{AS}} and @code{@value{LD}} treat them as
3474 separate but equal sections. Anything you can say of one section is
3475 true of another.
3476 @c @ifset aout-bout
3477 When the program is running, however, it is
3478 customary for the text section to be unalterable. The
3479 text section is often shared among processes: it contains
3480 instructions, constants and the like. The data section of a running
3481 program is usually alterable: for example, C variables would be stored
3482 in the data section.
3483 @c @end ifset
3484
3485 @cindex bss section
3486 @item bss section
3487 This section contains zeroed bytes when your program begins running. It
3488 is used to hold uninitialized variables or common storage. The length of
3489 each partial program's bss section is important, but because it starts
3490 out containing zeroed bytes there is no need to store explicit zero
3491 bytes in the object file. The bss section was invented to eliminate
3492 those explicit zeros from object files.
3493
3494 @cindex absolute section
3495 @item absolute section
3496 Address 0 of this section is always ``relocated'' to runtime address 0.
3497 This is useful if you want to refer to an address that @code{@value{LD}} must
3498 not change when relocating. In this sense we speak of absolute
3499 addresses being ``unrelocatable'': they do not change during relocation.
3500
3501 @cindex undefined section
3502 @item undefined section
3503 This ``section'' is a catch-all for address references to objects not in
3504 the preceding sections.
3505 @c FIXME: ref to some other doc on obj-file formats could go here.
3506 @end table
3507
3508 @cindex relocation example
3509 An idealized example of three relocatable sections follows.
3510 @ifset COFF-ELF
3511 The example uses the traditional section names @samp{.text} and @samp{.data}.
3512 @end ifset
3513 Memory addresses are on the horizontal axis.
3514
3515 @c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
3516 @ifnottex
3517 @c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
3518 @smallexample
3519 +-----+----+--+
3520 partial program # 1: |ttttt|dddd|00|
3521 +-----+----+--+
3522
3523 text data bss
3524 seg. seg. seg.
3525
3526 +---+---+---+
3527 partial program # 2: |TTT|DDD|000|
3528 +---+---+---+
3529
3530 +--+---+-----+--+----+---+-----+~~
3531 linked program: | |TTT|ttttt| |dddd|DDD|00000|
3532 +--+---+-----+--+----+---+-----+~~
3533
3534 addresses: 0 @dots{}
3535 @end smallexample
3536 @c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
3537 @end ifnottex
3538 @need 5000
3539 @tex
3540 \bigskip
3541 \line{\it Partial program \#1: \hfil}
3542 \line{\ibox{2.5cm}{\tt text}\ibox{2cm}{\tt data}\ibox{1cm}{\tt bss}\hfil}
3543 \line{\boxit{2.5cm}{\tt ttttt}\boxit{2cm}{\tt dddd}\boxit{1cm}{\tt 00}\hfil}
3544
3545 \line{\it Partial program \#2: \hfil}
3546 \line{\ibox{1cm}{\tt text}\ibox{1.5cm}{\tt data}\ibox{1cm}{\tt bss}\hfil}
3547 \line{\boxit{1cm}{\tt TTT}\boxit{1.5cm}{\tt DDDD}\boxit{1cm}{\tt 000}\hfil}
3548
3549 \line{\it linked program: \hfil}
3550 \line{\ibox{.5cm}{}\ibox{1cm}{\tt text}\ibox{2.5cm}{}\ibox{.75cm}{}\ibox{2cm}{\tt data}\ibox{1.5cm}{}\ibox{2cm}{\tt bss}\hfil}
3551 \line{\boxit{.5cm}{}\boxit{1cm}{\tt TTT}\boxit{2.5cm}{\tt
3552 ttttt}\boxit{.75cm}{}\boxit{2cm}{\tt dddd}\boxit{1.5cm}{\tt
3553 DDDD}\boxit{2cm}{\tt 00000}\ \dots\hfil}
3554
3555 \line{\it addresses: \hfil}
3556 \line{0\dots\hfil}
3557
3558 @end tex
3559 @c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
3560
3561 @node As Sections
3562 @section Assembler Internal Sections
3563
3564 @cindex internal assembler sections
3565 @cindex sections in messages, internal
3566 These sections are meant only for the internal use of @command{@value{AS}}. They
3567 have no meaning at run-time. You do not really need to know about these
3568 sections for most purposes; but they can be mentioned in @command{@value{AS}}
3569 warning messages, so it might be helpful to have an idea of their
3570 meanings to @command{@value{AS}}. These sections are used to permit the
3571 value of every expression in your assembly language program to be a
3572 section-relative address.
3573
3574 @table @b
3575 @cindex assembler internal logic error
3576 @item ASSEMBLER-INTERNAL-LOGIC-ERROR!
3577 An internal assembler logic error has been found. This means there is a
3578 bug in the assembler.
3579
3580 @cindex expr (internal section)
3581 @item expr section
3582 The assembler stores complex expression internally as combinations of
3583 symbols. When it needs to represent an expression as a symbol, it puts
3584 it in the expr section.
3585 @c FIXME item debug
3586 @c FIXME item transfer[t] vector preload
3587 @c FIXME item transfer[t] vector postload
3588 @c FIXME item register
3589 @end table
3590
3591 @node Sub-Sections
3592 @section Sub-Sections
3593
3594 @cindex numbered subsections
3595 @cindex grouping data
3596 @ifset aout-bout
3597 Assembled bytes
3598 @ifset COFF-ELF
3599 conventionally
3600 @end ifset
3601 fall into two sections: text and data.
3602 @end ifset
3603 You may have separate groups of
3604 @ifset GENERIC
3605 data in named sections
3606 @end ifset
3607 @ifclear GENERIC
3608 @ifclear aout-bout
3609 data in named sections
3610 @end ifclear
3611 @ifset aout-bout
3612 text or data
3613 @end ifset
3614 @end ifclear
3615 that you want to end up near to each other in the object file, even though they
3616 are not contiguous in the assembler source. @command{@value{AS}} allows you to
3617 use @dfn{subsections} for this purpose. Within each section, there can be
3618 numbered subsections with values from 0 to 8192. Objects assembled into the
3619 same subsection go into the object file together with other objects in the same
3620 subsection. For example, a compiler might want to store constants in the text
3621 section, but might not want to have them interspersed with the program being
3622 assembled. In this case, the compiler could issue a @samp{.text 0} before each
3623 section of code being output, and a @samp{.text 1} before each group of
3624 constants being output.
3625
3626 Subsections are optional. If you do not use subsections, everything
3627 goes in subsection number zero.
3628
3629 @ifset GENERIC
3630 Each subsection is zero-padded up to a multiple of four bytes.
3631 (Subsections may be padded a different amount on different flavors
3632 of @command{@value{AS}}.)
3633 @end ifset
3634 @ifclear GENERIC
3635 @ifset H8
3636 On the H8/300 platform, each subsection is zero-padded to a word
3637 boundary (two bytes).
3638 The same is true on the Renesas SH.
3639 @end ifset
3640 @ifset I960
3641 @c FIXME section padding (alignment)?
3642 @c Rich Pixley says padding here depends on target obj code format; that
3643 @c doesn't seem particularly useful to say without further elaboration,
3644 @c so for now I say nothing about it. If this is a generic BFD issue,
3645 @c these paragraphs might need to vanish from this manual, and be
3646 @c discussed in BFD chapter of binutils (or some such).
3647 @end ifset
3648 @end ifclear
3649
3650 Subsections appear in your object file in numeric order, lowest numbered
3651 to highest. (All this to be compatible with other people's assemblers.)
3652 The object file contains no representation of subsections; @code{@value{LD}} and
3653 other programs that manipulate object files see no trace of them.
3654 They just see all your text subsections as a text section, and all your
3655 data subsections as a data section.
3656
3657 To specify which subsection you want subsequent statements assembled
3658 into, use a numeric argument to specify it, in a @samp{.text
3659 @var{expression}} or a @samp{.data @var{expression}} statement.
3660 @ifset COFF
3661 @ifset GENERIC
3662 When generating COFF output, you
3663 @end ifset
3664 @ifclear GENERIC
3665 You
3666 @end ifclear
3667 can also use an extra subsection
3668 argument with arbitrary named sections: @samp{.section @var{name},
3669 @var{expression}}.
3670 @end ifset
3671 @ifset ELF
3672 @ifset GENERIC
3673 When generating ELF output, you
3674 @end ifset
3675 @ifclear GENERIC
3676 You
3677 @end ifclear
3678 can also use the @code{.subsection} directive (@pxref{SubSection})
3679 to specify a subsection: @samp{.subsection @var{expression}}.
3680 @end ifset
3681 @var{Expression} should be an absolute expression
3682 (@pxref{Expressions}). If you just say @samp{.text} then @samp{.text 0}
3683 is assumed. Likewise @samp{.data} means @samp{.data 0}. Assembly
3684 begins in @code{text 0}. For instance:
3685 @smallexample
3686 .text 0 # The default subsection is text 0 anyway.
3687 .ascii "This lives in the first text subsection. *"
3688 .text 1
3689 .ascii "But this lives in the second text subsection."
3690 .data 0
3691 .ascii "This lives in the data section,"
3692 .ascii "in the first data subsection."
3693 .text 0
3694 .ascii "This lives in the first text section,"
3695 .ascii "immediately following the asterisk (*)."
3696 @end smallexample
3697
3698 Each section has a @dfn{location counter} incremented by one for every byte
3699 assembled into that section. Because subsections are merely a convenience
3700 restricted to @command{@value{AS}} there is no concept of a subsection location
3701 counter. There is no way to directly manipulate a location counter---but the
3702 @code{.align} directive changes it, and any label definition captures its
3703 current value. The location counter of the section where statements are being
3704 assembled is said to be the @dfn{active} location counter.
3705
3706 @node bss
3707 @section bss Section
3708
3709 @cindex bss section
3710 @cindex common variable storage
3711 The bss section is used for local common variable storage.
3712 You may allocate address space in the bss section, but you may
3713 not dictate data to load into it before your program executes. When
3714 your program starts running, all the contents of the bss
3715 section are zeroed bytes.
3716
3717 The @code{.lcomm} pseudo-op defines a symbol in the bss section; see
3718 @ref{Lcomm,,@code{.lcomm}}.
3719
3720 The @code{.comm} pseudo-op may be used to declare a common symbol, which is
3721 another form of uninitialized symbol; see @ref{Comm,,@code{.comm}}.
3722
3723 @ifset GENERIC
3724 When assembling for a target which supports multiple sections, such as ELF or
3725 COFF, you may switch into the @code{.bss} section and define symbols as usual;
3726 see @ref{Section,,@code{.section}}. You may only assemble zero values into the
3727 section. Typically the section will only contain symbol definitions and
3728 @code{.skip} directives (@pxref{Skip,,@code{.skip}}).
3729 @end ifset
3730
3731 @node Symbols
3732 @chapter Symbols
3733
3734 @cindex symbols
3735 Symbols are a central concept: the programmer uses symbols to name
3736 things, the linker uses symbols to link, and the debugger uses symbols
3737 to debug.
3738
3739 @quotation
3740 @cindex debuggers, and symbol order
3741 @emph{Warning:} @command{@value{AS}} does not place symbols in the object file in
3742 the same order they were declared. This may break some debuggers.
3743 @end quotation
3744
3745 @menu
3746 * Labels:: Labels
3747 * Setting Symbols:: Giving Symbols Other Values
3748 * Symbol Names:: Symbol Names
3749 * Dot:: The Special Dot Symbol
3750 * Symbol Attributes:: Symbol Attributes
3751 @end menu
3752
3753 @node Labels
3754 @section Labels
3755
3756 @cindex labels
3757 A @dfn{label} is written as a symbol immediately followed by a colon
3758 @samp{:}. The symbol then represents the current value of the
3759 active location counter, and is, for example, a suitable instruction
3760 operand. You are warned if you use the same symbol to represent two
3761 different locations: the first definition overrides any other
3762 definitions.
3763
3764 @ifset HPPA
3765 On the HPPA, the usual form for a label need not be immediately followed by a
3766 colon, but instead must start in column zero. Only one label may be defined on
3767 a single line. To work around this, the HPPA version of @command{@value{AS}} also
3768 provides a special directive @code{.label} for defining labels more flexibly.
3769 @end ifset
3770
3771 @node Setting Symbols
3772 @section Giving Symbols Other Values
3773
3774 @cindex assigning values to symbols
3775 @cindex symbol values, assigning
3776 A symbol can be given an arbitrary value by writing a symbol, followed
3777 by an equals sign @samp{=}, followed by an expression
3778 (@pxref{Expressions}). This is equivalent to using the @code{.set}
3779 directive. @xref{Set,,@code{.set}}. In the same way, using a double
3780 equals sign @samp{=}@samp{=} here represents an equivalent of the
3781 @code{.eqv} directive. @xref{Eqv,,@code{.eqv}}.
3782
3783 @ifset Blackfin
3784 Blackfin does not support symbol assignment with @samp{=}.
3785 @end ifset
3786
3787 @node Symbol Names
3788 @section Symbol Names
3789
3790 @cindex symbol names
3791 @cindex names, symbol
3792 @ifclear SPECIAL-SYMS
3793 Symbol names begin with a letter or with one of @samp{._}. On most
3794 machines, you can also use @code{$} in symbol names; exceptions are
3795 noted in @ref{Machine Dependencies}. That character may be followed by any
3796 string of digits, letters, dollar signs (unless otherwise noted for a
3797 particular target machine), and underscores.
3798 @end ifclear
3799 @ifset SPECIAL-SYMS
3800 @ifset H8
3801 Symbol names begin with a letter or with one of @samp{._}. On the
3802 Renesas SH you can also use @code{$} in symbol names. That
3803 character may be followed by any string of digits, letters, dollar signs (save
3804 on the H8/300), and underscores.
3805 @end ifset
3806 @end ifset
3807
3808 Case of letters is significant: @code{foo} is a different symbol name
3809 than @code{Foo}.
3810
3811 Symbol names do not start with a digit. An exception to this rule is made for
3812 Local Labels. See below.
3813
3814 Multibyte characters are supported. To generate a symbol name containing
3815 multibyte characters enclose it within double quotes and use escape codes. cf
3816 @xref{Strings}. Generating a multibyte symbol name from a label is not
3817 currently supported.
3818
3819 Each symbol has exactly one name. Each name in an assembly language program
3820 refers to exactly one symbol. You may use that symbol name any number of times
3821 in a program.
3822
3823 @subheading Local Symbol Names
3824
3825 @cindex local symbol names
3826 @cindex symbol names, local
3827 A local symbol is any symbol beginning with certain local label prefixes.
3828 By default, the local label prefix is @samp{.L} for ELF systems or
3829 @samp{L} for traditional a.out systems, but each target may have its own
3830 set of local label prefixes.
3831 @ifset HPPA
3832 On the HPPA local symbols begin with @samp{L$}.
3833 @end ifset
3834
3835 Local symbols are defined and used within the assembler, but they are
3836 normally not saved in object files. Thus, they are not visible when debugging.
3837 You may use the @samp{-L} option (@pxref{L, ,Include Local Symbols})
3838 to retain the local symbols in the object files.
3839
3840 @subheading Local Labels
3841
3842 @cindex local labels
3843 @cindex temporary symbol names
3844 @cindex symbol names, temporary
3845 Local labels are different from local symbols. Local labels help compilers and
3846 programmers use names temporarily. They create symbols which are guaranteed to
3847 be unique over the entire scope of the input source code and which can be
3848 referred to by a simple notation. To define a local label, write a label of
3849 the form @samp{@b{N}:} (where @b{N} represents any non-negative integer).
3850 To refer to the most recent previous definition of that label write
3851 @samp{@b{N}b}, using the same number as when you defined the label. To refer
3852 to the next definition of a local label, write @samp{@b{N}f}. The @samp{b}
3853 stands for ``backwards'' and the @samp{f} stands for ``forwards''.
3854
3855 There is no restriction on how you can use these labels, and you can reuse them
3856 too. So that it is possible to repeatedly define the same local label (using
3857 the same number @samp{@b{N}}), although you can only refer to the most recently
3858 defined local label of that number (for a backwards reference) or the next
3859 definition of a specific local label for a forward reference. It is also worth
3860 noting that the first 10 local labels (@samp{@b{0:}}@dots{}@samp{@b{9:}}) are
3861 implemented in a slightly more efficient manner than the others.
3862
3863 Here is an example:
3864
3865 @smallexample
3866 1: branch 1f
3867 2: branch 1b
3868 1: branch 2f
3869 2: branch 1b
3870 @end smallexample
3871
3872 Which is the equivalent of:
3873
3874 @smallexample
3875 label_1: branch label_3
3876 label_2: branch label_1
3877 label_3: branch label_4
3878 label_4: branch label_3
3879 @end smallexample
3880
3881 Local label names are only a notational device. They are immediately
3882 transformed into more conventional symbol names before the assembler uses them.
3883 The symbol names are stored in the symbol table, appear in error messages, and
3884 are optionally emitted to the object file. The names are constructed using
3885 these parts:
3886
3887 @table @code
3888 @item @emph{local label prefix}
3889 All local symbols begin with the system-specific local label prefix.
3890 Normally both @command{@value{AS}} and @code{@value{LD}} forget symbols
3891 that start with the local label prefix. These labels are
3892 used for symbols you are never intended to see. If you use the
3893 @samp{-L} option then @command{@value{AS}} retains these symbols in the
3894 object file. If you also instruct @code{@value{LD}} to retain these symbols,
3895 you may use them in debugging.
3896
3897 @item @var{number}
3898 This is the number that was used in the local label definition. So if the
3899 label is written @samp{55:} then the number is @samp{55}.
3900
3901 @item @kbd{C-B}
3902 This unusual character is included so you do not accidentally invent a symbol
3903 of the same name. The character has ASCII value of @samp{\002} (control-B).
3904
3905 @item @emph{ordinal number}
3906 This is a serial number to keep the labels distinct. The first definition of
3907 @samp{0:} gets the number @samp{1}. The 15th definition of @samp{0:} gets the
3908 number @samp{15}, and so on. Likewise the first definition of @samp{1:} gets
3909 the number @samp{1} and its 15th definition gets @samp{15} as well.
3910 @end table
3911
3912 So for example, the first @code{1:} may be named @code{.L1@kbd{C-B}1}, and
3913 the 44th @code{3:} may be named @code{.L3@kbd{C-B}44}.
3914
3915 @subheading Dollar Local Labels
3916 @cindex dollar local symbols
3917
3918 On some targets @code{@value{AS}} also supports an even more local form of
3919 local labels called dollar labels. These labels go out of scope (i.e., they
3920 become undefined) as soon as a non-local label is defined. Thus they remain
3921 valid for only a small region of the input source code. Normal local labels,
3922 by contrast, remain in scope for the entire file, or until they are redefined
3923 by another occurrence of the same local label.
3924
3925 Dollar labels are defined in exactly the same way as ordinary local labels,
3926 except that they have a dollar sign suffix to their numeric value, e.g.,
3927 @samp{@b{55$:}}.
3928
3929 They can also be distinguished from ordinary local labels by their transformed
3930 names which use ASCII character @samp{\001} (control-A) as the magic character
3931 to distinguish them from ordinary labels. For example, the fifth definition of
3932 @samp{6$} may be named @samp{.L6@kbd{C-A}5}.
3933
3934 @node Dot
3935 @section The Special Dot Symbol
3936
3937 @cindex dot (symbol)
3938 @cindex @code{.} (symbol)
3939 @cindex current address
3940 @cindex location counter
3941 The special symbol @samp{.} refers to the current address that
3942 @command{@value{AS}} is assembling into. Thus, the expression @samp{melvin:
3943 .long .} defines @code{melvin} to contain its own address.
3944 Assigning a value to @code{.} is treated the same as a @code{.org}
3945 directive.
3946 @ifclear no-space-dir
3947 Thus, the expression @samp{.=.+4} is the same as saying
3948 @samp{.space 4}.
3949 @end ifclear
3950
3951 @node Symbol Attributes
3952 @section Symbol Attributes
3953
3954 @cindex symbol attributes
3955 @cindex attributes, symbol
3956 Every symbol has, as well as its name, the attributes ``Value'' and
3957 ``Type''. Depending on output format, symbols can also have auxiliary
3958 attributes.
3959 @ifset INTERNALS
3960 The detailed definitions are in @file{a.out.h}.
3961 @end ifset
3962
3963 If you use a symbol without defining it, @command{@value{AS}} assumes zero for
3964 all these attributes, and probably won't warn you. This makes the
3965 symbol an externally defined symbol, which is generally what you
3966 would want.
3967
3968 @menu
3969 * Symbol Value:: Value
3970 * Symbol Type:: Type
3971 @ifset aout-bout
3972 @ifset GENERIC
3973 * a.out Symbols:: Symbol Attributes: @code{a.out}
3974 @end ifset
3975 @ifclear GENERIC
3976 @ifclear BOUT
3977 * a.out Symbols:: Symbol Attributes: @code{a.out}
3978 @end ifclear
3979 @ifset BOUT
3980 * a.out Symbols:: Symbol Attributes: @code{a.out}, @code{b.out}
3981 @end ifset
3982 @end ifclear
3983 @end ifset
3984 @ifset COFF
3985 * COFF Symbols:: Symbol Attributes for COFF
3986 @end ifset
3987 @ifset SOM
3988 * SOM Symbols:: Symbol Attributes for SOM
3989 @end ifset
3990 @end menu
3991
3992 @node Symbol Value
3993 @subsection Value
3994
3995 @cindex value of a symbol
3996 @cindex symbol value
3997 The value of a symbol is (usually) 32 bits. For a symbol which labels a
3998 location in the text, data, bss or absolute sections the value is the
3999 number of addresses from the start of that section to the label.
4000 Naturally for text, data and bss sections the value of a symbol changes
4001 as @code{@value{LD}} changes section base addresses during linking. Absolute
4002 symbols' values do not change during linking: that is why they are
4003 called absolute.
4004
4005 The value of an undefined symbol is treated in a special way. If it is
4006 0 then the symbol is not defined in this assembler source file, and
4007 @code{@value{LD}} tries to determine its value from other files linked into the
4008 same program. You make this kind of symbol simply by mentioning a symbol
4009 name without defining it. A non-zero value represents a @code{.comm}
4010 common declaration. The value is how much common storage to reserve, in
4011 bytes (addresses). The symbol refers to the first address of the
4012 allocated storage.
4013
4014 @node Symbol Type
4015 @subsection Type
4016
4017 @cindex type of a symbol
4018 @cindex symbol type
4019 The type attribute of a symbol contains relocation (section)
4020 information, any flag settings indicating that a symbol is external, and
4021 (optionally), other information for linkers and debuggers. The exact
4022 format depends on the object-code output format in use.
4023
4024 @ifset aout-bout
4025 @ifclear GENERIC
4026 @ifset BOUT
4027 @c The following avoids a "widow" subsection title. @group would be
4028 @c better if it were available outside examples.
4029 @need 1000
4030 @node a.out Symbols
4031 @subsection Symbol Attributes: @code{a.out}, @code{b.out}
4032
4033 @cindex @code{b.out} symbol attributes
4034 @cindex symbol attributes, @code{b.out}
4035 These symbol attributes appear only when @command{@value{AS}} is configured for
4036 one of the Berkeley-descended object output formats---@code{a.out} or
4037 @code{b.out}.
4038
4039 @end ifset
4040 @ifclear BOUT
4041 @node a.out Symbols
4042 @subsection Symbol Attributes: @code{a.out}
4043
4044 @cindex @code{a.out} symbol attributes
4045 @cindex symbol attributes, @code{a.out}
4046
4047 @end ifclear
4048 @end ifclear
4049 @ifset GENERIC
4050 @node a.out Symbols
4051 @subsection Symbol Attributes: @code{a.out}
4052
4053 @cindex @code{a.out} symbol attributes
4054 @cindex symbol attributes, @code{a.out}
4055
4056 @end ifset
4057 @menu
4058 * Symbol Desc:: Descriptor
4059 * Symbol Other:: Other
4060 @end menu
4061
4062 @node Symbol Desc
4063 @subsubsection Descriptor
4064
4065 @cindex descriptor, of @code{a.out} symbol
4066 This is an arbitrary 16-bit value. You may establish a symbol's
4067 descriptor value by using a @code{.desc} statement
4068 (@pxref{Desc,,@code{.desc}}). A descriptor value means nothing to
4069 @command{@value{AS}}.
4070
4071 @node Symbol Other
4072 @subsubsection Other
4073
4074 @cindex other attribute, of @code{a.out} symbol
4075 This is an arbitrary 8-bit value. It means nothing to @command{@value{AS}}.
4076 @end ifset
4077
4078 @ifset COFF
4079 @node COFF Symbols
4080 @subsection Symbol Attributes for COFF
4081
4082 @cindex COFF symbol attributes
4083 @cindex symbol attributes, COFF
4084
4085 The COFF format supports a multitude of auxiliary symbol attributes;
4086 like the primary symbol attributes, they are set between @code{.def} and
4087 @code{.endef} directives.
4088
4089 @subsubsection Primary Attributes
4090
4091 @cindex primary attributes, COFF symbols
4092 The symbol name is set with @code{.def}; the value and type,
4093 respectively, with @code{.val} and @code{.type}.
4094
4095 @subsubsection Auxiliary Attributes
4096
4097 @cindex auxiliary attributes, COFF symbols
4098 The @command{@value{AS}} directives @code{.dim}, @code{.line}, @code{.scl},
4099 @code{.size}, @code{.tag}, and @code{.weak} can generate auxiliary symbol
4100 table information for COFF.
4101 @end ifset
4102
4103 @ifset SOM
4104 @node SOM Symbols
4105 @subsection Symbol Attributes for SOM
4106
4107 @cindex SOM symbol attributes
4108 @cindex symbol attributes, SOM
4109
4110 The SOM format for the HPPA supports a multitude of symbol attributes set with
4111 the @code{.EXPORT} and @code{.IMPORT} directives.
4112
4113 The attributes are described in @cite{HP9000 Series 800 Assembly
4114 Language Reference Manual} (HP 92432-90001) under the @code{IMPORT} and
4115 @code{EXPORT} assembler directive documentation.
4116 @end ifset
4117
4118 @node Expressions
4119 @chapter Expressions
4120
4121 @cindex expressions
4122 @cindex addresses
4123 @cindex numeric values
4124 An @dfn{expression} specifies an address or numeric value.
4125 Whitespace may precede and/or follow an expression.
4126
4127 The result of an expression must be an absolute number, or else an offset into
4128 a particular section. If an expression is not absolute, and there is not
4129 enough information when @command{@value{AS}} sees the expression to know its
4130 section, a second pass over the source program might be necessary to interpret
4131 the expression---but the second pass is currently not implemented.
4132 @command{@value{AS}} aborts with an error message in this situation.
4133
4134 @menu
4135 * Empty Exprs:: Empty Expressions
4136 * Integer Exprs:: Integer Expressions
4137 @end menu
4138
4139 @node Empty Exprs
4140 @section Empty Expressions
4141
4142 @cindex empty expressions
4143 @cindex expressions, empty
4144 An empty expression has no value: it is just whitespace or null.
4145 Wherever an absolute expression is required, you may omit the
4146 expression, and @command{@value{AS}} assumes a value of (absolute) 0. This
4147 is compatible with other assemblers.
4148
4149 @node Integer Exprs
4150 @section Integer Expressions
4151
4152 @cindex integer expressions
4153 @cindex expressions, integer
4154 An @dfn{integer expression} is one or more @emph{arguments} delimited
4155 by @emph{operators}.
4156
4157 @menu
4158 * Arguments:: Arguments
4159 * Operators:: Operators
4160 * Prefix Ops:: Prefix Operators
4161 * Infix Ops:: Infix Operators
4162 @end menu
4163
4164 @node Arguments
4165 @subsection Arguments
4166
4167 @cindex expression arguments
4168 @cindex arguments in expressions
4169 @cindex operands in expressions
4170 @cindex arithmetic operands
4171 @dfn{Arguments} are symbols, numbers or subexpressions. In other
4172 contexts arguments are sometimes called ``arithmetic operands''. In
4173 this manual, to avoid confusing them with the ``instruction operands'' of
4174 the machine language, we use the term ``argument'' to refer to parts of
4175 expressions only, reserving the word ``operand'' to refer only to machine
4176 instruction operands.
4177
4178 Symbols are evaluated to yield @{@var{section} @var{NNN}@} where
4179 @var{section} is one of text, data, bss, absolute,
4180 or undefined. @var{NNN} is a signed, 2's complement 32 bit
4181 integer.
4182
4183 Numbers are usually integers.
4184
4185 A number can be a flonum or bignum. In this case, you are warned
4186 that only the low order 32 bits are used, and @command{@value{AS}} pretends
4187 these 32 bits are an integer. You may write integer-manipulating
4188 instructions that act on exotic constants, compatible with other
4189 assemblers.
4190
4191 @cindex subexpressions
4192 Subexpressions are a left parenthesis @samp{(} followed by an integer
4193 expression, followed by a right parenthesis @samp{)}; or a prefix
4194 operator followed by an argument.
4195
4196 @node Operators
4197 @subsection Operators
4198
4199 @cindex operators, in expressions
4200 @cindex arithmetic functions
4201 @cindex functions, in expressions
4202 @dfn{Operators} are arithmetic functions, like @code{+} or @code{%}. Prefix
4203 operators are followed by an argument. Infix operators appear
4204 between their arguments. Operators may be preceded and/or followed by
4205 whitespace.
4206
4207 @node Prefix Ops
4208 @subsection Prefix Operator
4209
4210 @cindex prefix operators
4211 @command{@value{AS}} has the following @dfn{prefix operators}. They each take
4212 one argument, which must be absolute.
4213
4214 @c the tex/end tex stuff surrounding this small table is meant to make
4215 @c it align, on the printed page, with the similar table in the next
4216 @c section (which is inside an enumerate).
4217 @tex
4218 \global\advance\leftskip by \itemindent
4219 @end tex
4220
4221 @table @code
4222 @item -
4223 @dfn{Negation}. Two's complement negation.
4224 @item ~
4225 @dfn{Complementation}. Bitwise not.
4226 @end table
4227
4228 @tex
4229 \global\advance\leftskip by -\itemindent
4230 @end tex
4231
4232 @node Infix Ops
4233 @subsection Infix Operators
4234
4235 @cindex infix operators
4236 @cindex operators, permitted arguments
4237 @dfn{Infix operators} take two arguments, one on either side. Operators
4238 have precedence, but operations with equal precedence are performed left
4239 to right. Apart from @code{+} or @option{-}, both arguments must be
4240 absolute, and the result is absolute.
4241
4242 @enumerate
4243 @cindex operator precedence
4244 @cindex precedence of operators
4245
4246 @item
4247 Highest Precedence
4248
4249 @table @code
4250 @item *
4251 @dfn{Multiplication}.
4252
4253 @item /
4254 @dfn{Division}. Truncation is the same as the C operator @samp{/}
4255
4256 @item %
4257 @dfn{Remainder}.
4258
4259 @item <<
4260 @dfn{Shift Left}. Same as the C operator @samp{<<}.
4261
4262 @item >>
4263 @dfn{Shift Right}. Same as the C operator @samp{>>}.
4264 @end table
4265
4266 @item
4267 Intermediate precedence
4268
4269 @table @code
4270 @item |
4271
4272 @dfn{Bitwise Inclusive Or}.
4273
4274 @item &
4275 @dfn{Bitwise And}.
4276
4277 @item ^
4278 @dfn{Bitwise Exclusive Or}.
4279
4280 @item !
4281 @dfn{Bitwise Or Not}.
4282 @end table
4283
4284 @item
4285 Low Precedence
4286
4287 @table @code
4288 @cindex addition, permitted arguments
4289 @cindex plus, permitted arguments
4290 @cindex arguments for addition
4291 @item +
4292 @dfn{Addition}. If either argument is absolute, the result has the section of
4293 the other argument. You may not add together arguments from different
4294 sections.
4295
4296 @cindex subtraction, permitted arguments
4297 @cindex minus, permitted arguments
4298 @cindex arguments for subtraction
4299 @item -
4300 @dfn{Subtraction}. If the right argument is absolute, the
4301 result has the section of the left argument.
4302 If both arguments are in the same section, the result is absolute.
4303 You may not subtract arguments from different sections.
4304 @c FIXME is there still something useful to say about undefined - undefined ?
4305
4306 @cindex comparison expressions
4307 @cindex expressions, comparison
4308 @item ==
4309 @dfn{Is Equal To}
4310 @item <>
4311 @itemx !=
4312 @dfn{Is Not Equal To}
4313 @item <
4314 @dfn{Is Less Than}
4315 @item >
4316 @dfn{Is Greater Than}
4317 @item >=
4318 @dfn{Is Greater Than Or Equal To}
4319 @item <=
4320 @dfn{Is Less Than Or Equal To}
4321
4322 The comparison operators can be used as infix operators. A true results has a
4323 value of -1 whereas a false result has a value of 0. Note, these operators
4324 perform signed comparisons.
4325 @end table
4326
4327 @item Lowest Precedence
4328
4329 @table @code
4330 @item &&
4331 @dfn{Logical And}.
4332
4333 @item ||
4334 @dfn{Logical Or}.
4335
4336 These two logical operations can be used to combine the results of sub
4337 expressions. Note, unlike the comparison operators a true result returns a
4338 value of 1 but a false results does still return 0. Also note that the logical
4339 or operator has a slightly lower precedence than logical and.
4340
4341 @end table
4342 @end enumerate
4343
4344 In short, it's only meaningful to add or subtract the @emph{offsets} in an
4345 address; you can only have a defined section in one of the two arguments.
4346
4347 @node Pseudo Ops
4348 @chapter Assembler Directives
4349
4350 @cindex directives, machine independent
4351 @cindex pseudo-ops, machine independent
4352 @cindex machine independent directives
4353 All assembler directives have names that begin with a period (@samp{.}).
4354 The names are case insensitive for most targets, and usually written
4355 in lower case.
4356
4357 This chapter discusses directives that are available regardless of the
4358 target machine configuration for the @sc{gnu} assembler.
4359 @ifset GENERIC
4360 Some machine configurations provide additional directives.
4361 @xref{Machine Dependencies}.
4362 @end ifset
4363 @ifclear GENERIC
4364 @ifset machine-directives
4365 @xref{Machine Dependencies}, for additional directives.
4366 @end ifset
4367 @end ifclear
4368
4369 @menu
4370 * Abort:: @code{.abort}
4371 @ifset COFF
4372 * ABORT (COFF):: @code{.ABORT}
4373 @end ifset
4374
4375 * Align:: @code{.align @var{abs-expr} , @var{abs-expr}}
4376 * Altmacro:: @code{.altmacro}
4377 * Ascii:: @code{.ascii "@var{string}"}@dots{}
4378 * Asciz:: @code{.asciz "@var{string}"}@dots{}
4379 * Balign:: @code{.balign @var{abs-expr} , @var{abs-expr}}
4380 * Bundle directives:: @code{.bundle_align_mode @var{abs-expr}}, etc
4381 * Byte:: @code{.byte @var{expressions}}
4382 * CFI directives:: @code{.cfi_startproc [simple]}, @code{.cfi_endproc}, etc.
4383 * Comm:: @code{.comm @var{symbol} , @var{length} }
4384 * Data:: @code{.data @var{subsection}}
4385 @ifset COFF
4386 * Def:: @code{.def @var{name}}
4387 @end ifset
4388 @ifset aout-bout
4389 * Desc:: @code{.desc @var{symbol}, @var{abs-expression}}
4390 @end ifset
4391 @ifset COFF
4392 * Dim:: @code{.dim}
4393 @end ifset
4394
4395 * Double:: @code{.double @var{flonums}}
4396 * Eject:: @code{.eject}
4397 * Else:: @code{.else}
4398 * Elseif:: @code{.elseif}
4399 * End:: @code{.end}
4400 @ifset COFF
4401 * Endef:: @code{.endef}
4402 @end ifset
4403
4404 * Endfunc:: @code{.endfunc}
4405 * Endif:: @code{.endif}
4406 * Equ:: @code{.equ @var{symbol}, @var{expression}}
4407 * Equiv:: @code{.equiv @var{symbol}, @var{expression}}
4408 * Eqv:: @code{.eqv @var{symbol}, @var{expression}}
4409 * Err:: @code{.err}
4410 * Error:: @code{.error @var{string}}
4411 * Exitm:: @code{.exitm}
4412 * Extern:: @code{.extern}
4413 * Fail:: @code{.fail}
4414 * File:: @code{.file}
4415 * Fill:: @code{.fill @var{repeat} , @var{size} , @var{value}}
4416 * Float:: @code{.float @var{flonums}}
4417 * Func:: @code{.func}
4418 * Global:: @code{.global @var{symbol}}, @code{.globl @var{symbol}}
4419 @ifset ELF
4420 * Gnu_attribute:: @code{.gnu_attribute @var{tag},@var{value}}
4421 * Hidden:: @code{.hidden @var{names}}
4422 @end ifset
4423
4424 * hword:: @code{.hword @var{expressions}}
4425 * Ident:: @code{.ident}
4426 * If:: @code{.if @var{absolute expression}}
4427 * Incbin:: @code{.incbin "@var{file}"[,@var{skip}[,@var{count}]]}
4428 * Include:: @code{.include "@var{file}"}
4429 * Int:: @code{.int @var{expressions}}
4430 @ifset ELF
4431 * Internal:: @code{.internal @var{names}}
4432 @end ifset
4433
4434 * Irp:: @code{.irp @var{symbol},@var{values}}@dots{}
4435 * Irpc:: @code{.irpc @var{symbol},@var{values}}@dots{}
4436 * Lcomm:: @code{.lcomm @var{symbol} , @var{length}}
4437 * Lflags:: @code{.lflags}
4438 @ifclear no-line-dir
4439 * Line:: @code{.line @var{line-number}}
4440 @end ifclear
4441
4442 * Linkonce:: @code{.linkonce [@var{type}]}
4443 * List:: @code{.list}
4444 * Ln:: @code{.ln @var{line-number}}
4445 * Loc:: @code{.loc @var{fileno} @var{lineno}}
4446 * Loc_mark_labels:: @code{.loc_mark_labels @var{enable}}
4447 @ifset ELF
4448 * Local:: @code{.local @var{names}}
4449 @end ifset
4450
4451 * Long:: @code{.long @var{expressions}}
4452 @ignore
4453 * Lsym:: @code{.lsym @var{symbol}, @var{expression}}
4454 @end ignore
4455
4456 * Macro:: @code{.macro @var{name} @var{args}}@dots{}
4457 * MRI:: @code{.mri @var{val}}
4458 * Noaltmacro:: @code{.noaltmacro}
4459 * Nolist:: @code{.nolist}
4460 * Octa:: @code{.octa @var{bignums}}
4461 * Offset:: @code{.offset @var{loc}}
4462 * Org:: @code{.org @var{new-lc}, @var{fill}}
4463 * P2align:: @code{.p2align @var{abs-expr}, @var{abs-expr}, @var{abs-expr}}
4464 @ifset ELF
4465 * PopSection:: @code{.popsection}
4466 * Previous:: @code{.previous}
4467 @end ifset
4468
4469 * Print:: @code{.print @var{string}}
4470 @ifset ELF
4471 * Protected:: @code{.protected @var{names}}
4472 @end ifset
4473
4474 * Psize:: @code{.psize @var{lines}, @var{columns}}
4475 * Purgem:: @code{.purgem @var{name}}
4476 @ifset ELF
4477 * PushSection:: @code{.pushsection @var{name}}
4478 @end ifset
4479
4480 * Quad:: @code{.quad @var{bignums}}
4481 * Reloc:: @code{.reloc @var{offset}, @var{reloc_name}[, @var{expression}]}
4482 * Rept:: @code{.rept @var{count}}
4483 * Sbttl:: @code{.sbttl "@var{subheading}"}
4484 @ifset COFF
4485 * Scl:: @code{.scl @var{class}}
4486 @end ifset
4487 @ifset COFF-ELF
4488 * Section:: @code{.section @var{name}[, @var{flags}]}
4489 @end ifset
4490
4491 * Set:: @code{.set @var{symbol}, @var{expression}}
4492 * Short:: @code{.short @var{expressions}}
4493 * Single:: @code{.single @var{flonums}}
4494 @ifset COFF-ELF
4495 * Size:: @code{.size [@var{name} , @var{expression}]}
4496 @end ifset
4497 @ifclear no-space-dir
4498 * Skip:: @code{.skip @var{size} , @var{fill}}
4499 @end ifclear
4500
4501 * Sleb128:: @code{.sleb128 @var{expressions}}
4502 @ifclear no-space-dir
4503 * Space:: @code{.space @var{size} , @var{fill}}
4504 @end ifclear
4505 @ifset have-stabs
4506 * Stab:: @code{.stabd, .stabn, .stabs}
4507 @end ifset
4508
4509 * String:: @code{.string "@var{str}"}, @code{.string8 "@var{str}"}, @code{.string16 "@var{str}"}, @code{.string32 "@var{str}"}, @code{.string64 "@var{str}"}
4510 * Struct:: @code{.struct @var{expression}}
4511 @ifset ELF
4512 * SubSection:: @code{.subsection}
4513 * Symver:: @code{.symver @var{name},@var{name2@@nodename}}
4514 @end ifset
4515
4516 @ifset COFF
4517 * Tag:: @code{.tag @var{structname}}
4518 @end ifset
4519
4520 * Text:: @code{.text @var{subsection}}
4521 * Title:: @code{.title "@var{heading}"}
4522 @ifset COFF-ELF
4523 * Type:: @code{.type <@var{int} | @var{name} , @var{type description}>}
4524 @end ifset
4525
4526 * Uleb128:: @code{.uleb128 @var{expressions}}
4527 @ifset COFF
4528 * Val:: @code{.val @var{addr}}
4529 @end ifset
4530
4531 @ifset ELF
4532 * Version:: @code{.version "@var{string}"}
4533 * VTableEntry:: @code{.vtable_entry @var{table}, @var{offset}}
4534 * VTableInherit:: @code{.vtable_inherit @var{child}, @var{parent}}
4535 @end ifset
4536
4537 * Warning:: @code{.warning @var{string}}
4538 * Weak:: @code{.weak @var{names}}
4539 * Weakref:: @code{.weakref @var{alias}, @var{symbol}}
4540 * Word:: @code{.word @var{expressions}}
4541 @ifclear no-space-dir
4542 * Zero:: @code{.zero @var{size}}
4543 @end ifclear
4544 * Deprecated:: Deprecated Directives
4545 @end menu
4546
4547 @node Abort
4548 @section @code{.abort}
4549
4550 @cindex @code{abort} directive
4551 @cindex stopping the assembly
4552 This directive stops the assembly immediately. It is for
4553 compatibility with other assemblers. The original idea was that the
4554 assembly language source would be piped into the assembler. If the sender
4555 of the source quit, it could use this directive tells @command{@value{AS}} to
4556 quit also. One day @code{.abort} will not be supported.
4557
4558 @ifset COFF
4559 @node ABORT (COFF)
4560 @section @code{.ABORT} (COFF)
4561
4562 @cindex @code{ABORT} directive
4563 When producing COFF output, @command{@value{AS}} accepts this directive as a
4564 synonym for @samp{.abort}.
4565
4566 @ifset BOUT
4567 When producing @code{b.out} output, @command{@value{AS}} accepts this directive,
4568 but ignores it.
4569 @end ifset
4570 @end ifset
4571
4572 @node Align
4573 @section @code{.align @var{abs-expr}, @var{abs-expr}, @var{abs-expr}}
4574
4575 @cindex padding the location counter
4576 @cindex @code{align} directive
4577 Pad the location counter (in the current subsection) to a particular storage
4578 boundary. The first expression (which must be absolute) is the alignment
4579 required, as described below.
4580
4581 The second expression (also absolute) gives the fill value to be stored in the
4582 padding bytes. It (and the comma) may be omitted. If it is omitted, the
4583 padding bytes are normally zero. However, on some systems, if the section is
4584 marked as containing code and the fill value is omitted, the space is filled
4585 with no-op instructions.
4586
4587 The third expression is also absolute, and is also optional. If it is present,
4588 it is the maximum number of bytes that should be skipped by this alignment
4589 directive. If doing the alignment would require skipping more bytes than the
4590 specified maximum, then the alignment is not done at all. You can omit the
4591 fill value (the second argument) entirely by simply using two commas after the
4592 required alignment; this can be useful if you want the alignment to be filled
4593 with no-op instructions when appropriate.
4594
4595 The way the required alignment is specified varies from system to system.
4596 For the arc, hppa, i386 using ELF, i860, iq2000, m68k, or1k,
4597 s390, sparc, tic4x, tic80 and xtensa, the first expression is the
4598 alignment request in bytes. For example @samp{.align 8} advances
4599 the location counter until it is a multiple of 8. If the location counter
4600 is already a multiple of 8, no change is needed. For the tic54x, the
4601 first expression is the alignment request in words.
4602
4603 For other systems, including ppc, i386 using a.out format, arm and
4604 strongarm, it is the
4605 number of low-order zero bits the location counter must have after
4606 advancement. For example @samp{.align 3} advances the location
4607 counter until it a multiple of 8. If the location counter is already a
4608 multiple of 8, no change is needed.
4609
4610 This inconsistency is due to the different behaviors of the various
4611 native assemblers for these systems which GAS must emulate.
4612 GAS also provides @code{.balign} and @code{.p2align} directives,
4613 described later, which have a consistent behavior across all
4614 architectures (but are specific to GAS).
4615
4616 @node Altmacro
4617 @section @code{.altmacro}
4618 Enable alternate macro mode, enabling:
4619
4620 @ftable @code
4621 @item LOCAL @var{name} [ , @dots{} ]
4622 One additional directive, @code{LOCAL}, is available. It is used to
4623 generate a string replacement for each of the @var{name} arguments, and
4624 replace any instances of @var{name} in each macro expansion. The
4625 replacement string is unique in the assembly, and different for each
4626 separate macro expansion. @code{LOCAL} allows you to write macros that
4627 define symbols, without fear of conflict between separate macro expansions.
4628
4629 @item String delimiters
4630 You can write strings delimited in these other ways besides
4631 @code{"@var{string}"}:
4632
4633 @table @code
4634 @item '@var{string}'
4635 You can delimit strings with single-quote characters.
4636
4637 @item <@var{string}>
4638 You can delimit strings with matching angle brackets.
4639 @end table
4640
4641 @item single-character string escape
4642 To include any single character literally in a string (even if the
4643 character would otherwise have some special meaning), you can prefix the
4644 character with @samp{!} (an exclamation mark). For example, you can
4645 write @samp{<4.3 !> 5.4!!>} to get the literal text @samp{4.3 > 5.4!}.
4646
4647 @item Expression results as strings
4648 You can write @samp{%@var{expr}} to evaluate the expression @var{expr}
4649 and use the result as a string.
4650 @end ftable
4651
4652 @node Ascii
4653 @section @code{.ascii "@var{string}"}@dots{}
4654
4655 @cindex @code{ascii} directive
4656 @cindex string literals
4657 @code{.ascii} expects zero or more string literals (@pxref{Strings})
4658 separated by commas. It assembles each string (with no automatic
4659 trailing zero byte) into consecutive addresses.
4660
4661 @node Asciz
4662 @section @code{.asciz "@var{string}"}@dots{}
4663
4664 @cindex @code{asciz} directive
4665 @cindex zero-terminated strings
4666 @cindex null-terminated strings
4667 @code{.asciz} is just like @code{.ascii}, but each string is followed by
4668 a zero byte. The ``z'' in @samp{.asciz} stands for ``zero''.
4669
4670 @node Balign
4671 @section @code{.balign[wl] @var{abs-expr}, @var{abs-expr}, @var{abs-expr}}
4672
4673 @cindex padding the location counter given number of bytes
4674 @cindex @code{balign} directive
4675 Pad the location counter (in the current subsection) to a particular
4676 storage boundary. The first expression (which must be absolute) is the
4677 alignment request in bytes. For example @samp{.balign 8} advances
4678 the location counter until it is a multiple of 8. If the location counter
4679 is already a multiple of 8, no change is needed.
4680
4681 The second expression (also absolute) gives the fill value to be stored in the
4682 padding bytes. It (and the comma) may be omitted. If it is omitted, the
4683 padding bytes are normally zero. However, on some systems, if the section is
4684 marked as containing code and the fill value is omitted, the space is filled
4685 with no-op instructions.
4686
4687 The third expression is also absolute, and is also optional. If it is present,
4688 it is the maximum number of bytes that should be skipped by this alignment
4689 directive. If doing the alignment would require skipping more bytes than the
4690 specified maximum, then the alignment is not done at all. You can omit the
4691 fill value (the second argument) entirely by simply using two commas after the
4692 required alignment; this can be useful if you want the alignment to be filled
4693 with no-op instructions when appropriate.
4694
4695 @cindex @code{balignw} directive
4696 @cindex @code{balignl} directive
4697 The @code{.balignw} and @code{.balignl} directives are variants of the
4698 @code{.balign} directive. The @code{.balignw} directive treats the fill
4699 pattern as a two byte word value. The @code{.balignl} directives treats the
4700 fill pattern as a four byte longword value. For example, @code{.balignw
4701 4,0x368d} will align to a multiple of 4. If it skips two bytes, they will be
4702 filled in with the value 0x368d (the exact placement of the bytes depends upon
4703 the endianness of the processor). If it skips 1 or 3 bytes, the fill value is
4704 undefined.
4705
4706 @node Bundle directives
4707 @section Bundle directives
4708 @subsection @code{.bundle_align_mode @var{abs-expr}}
4709 @cindex @code{bundle_align_mode} directive
4710 @cindex bundle
4711 @cindex instruction bundle
4712 @cindex aligned instruction bundle
4713 @code{.bundle_align_mode} enables or disables @dfn{aligned instruction
4714 bundle} mode. In this mode, sequences of adjacent instructions are grouped
4715 into fixed-sized @dfn{bundles}. If the argument is zero, this mode is
4716 disabled (which is the default state). If the argument it not zero, it
4717 gives the size of an instruction bundle as a power of two (as for the
4718 @code{.p2align} directive, @pxref{P2align}).
4719
4720 For some targets, it's an ABI requirement that no instruction may span a
4721 certain aligned boundary. A @dfn{bundle} is simply a sequence of
4722 instructions that starts on an aligned boundary. For example, if
4723 @var{abs-expr} is @code{5} then the bundle size is 32, so each aligned
4724 chunk of 32 bytes is a bundle. When aligned instruction bundle mode is in
4725 effect, no single instruction may span a boundary between bundles. If an
4726 instruction would start too close to the end of a bundle for the length of
4727 that particular instruction to fit within the bundle, then the space at the
4728 end of that bundle is filled with no-op instructions so the instruction
4729 starts in the next bundle. As a corollary, it's an error if any single
4730 instruction's encoding is longer than the bundle size.
4731
4732 @subsection @code{.bundle_lock} and @code{.bundle_unlock}
4733 @cindex @code{bundle_lock} directive
4734 @cindex @code{bundle_unlock} directive
4735 The @code{.bundle_lock} and directive @code{.bundle_unlock} directives
4736 allow explicit control over instruction bundle padding. These directives
4737 are only valid when @code{.bundle_align_mode} has been used to enable
4738 aligned instruction bundle mode. It's an error if they appear when
4739 @code{.bundle_align_mode} has not been used at all, or when the last
4740 directive was @w{@code{.bundle_align_mode 0}}.
4741
4742 @cindex bundle-locked
4743 For some targets, it's an ABI requirement that certain instructions may
4744 appear only as part of specified permissible sequences of multiple
4745 instructions, all within the same bundle. A pair of @code{.bundle_lock}
4746 and @code{.bundle_unlock} directives define a @dfn{bundle-locked}
4747 instruction sequence. For purposes of aligned instruction bundle mode, a
4748 sequence starting with @code{.bundle_lock} and ending with
4749 @code{.bundle_unlock} is treated as a single instruction. That is, the
4750 entire sequence must fit into a single bundle and may not span a bundle
4751 boundary. If necessary, no-op instructions will be inserted before the
4752 first instruction of the sequence so that the whole sequence starts on an
4753 aligned bundle boundary. It's an error if the sequence is longer than the
4754 bundle size.
4755
4756 For convenience when using @code{.bundle_lock} and @code{.bundle_unlock}
4757 inside assembler macros (@pxref{Macro}), bundle-locked sequences may be
4758 nested. That is, a second @code{.bundle_lock} directive before the next
4759 @code{.bundle_unlock} directive has no effect except that it must be
4760 matched by another closing @code{.bundle_unlock} so that there is the
4761 same number of @code{.bundle_lock} and @code{.bundle_unlock} directives.
4762
4763 @node Byte
4764 @section @code{.byte @var{expressions}}
4765
4766 @cindex @code{byte} directive
4767 @cindex integers, one byte
4768 @code{.byte} expects zero or more expressions, separated by commas.
4769 Each expression is assembled into the next byte.
4770
4771 @node CFI directives
4772 @section CFI directives
4773 @subsection @code{.cfi_sections @var{section_list}}
4774 @cindex @code{cfi_sections} directive
4775 @code{.cfi_sections} may be used to specify whether CFI directives
4776 should emit @code{.eh_frame} section and/or @code{.debug_frame} section.
4777 If @var{section_list} is @code{.eh_frame}, @code{.eh_frame} is emitted,
4778 if @var{section_list} is @code{.debug_frame}, @code{.debug_frame} is emitted.
4779 To emit both use @code{.eh_frame, .debug_frame}. The default if this
4780 directive is not used is @code{.cfi_sections .eh_frame}.
4781
4782 On targets that support compact unwinding tables these can be generated
4783 by specifying @code{.eh_frame_entry} instead of @code{.eh_frame}.
4784
4785 Some targets may support an additional name, such as @code{.c6xabi.exidx}
4786 which is used by the @value{TIC6X} target.
4787
4788 The @code{.cfi_sections} directive can be repeated, with the same or different
4789 arguments, provided that CFI generation has not yet started. Once CFI
4790 generation has started however the section list is fixed and any attempts to
4791 redefine it will result in an error.
4792
4793 @subsection @code{.cfi_startproc [simple]}
4794 @cindex @code{cfi_startproc} directive
4795 @code{.cfi_startproc} is used at the beginning of each function that
4796 should have an entry in @code{.eh_frame}. It initializes some internal
4797 data structures. Don't forget to close the function by
4798 @code{.cfi_endproc}.
4799
4800 Unless @code{.cfi_startproc} is used along with parameter @code{simple}
4801 it also emits some architecture dependent initial CFI instructions.
4802
4803 @subsection @code{.cfi_endproc}
4804 @cindex @code{cfi_endproc} directive
4805 @code{.cfi_endproc} is used at the end of a function where it closes its
4806 unwind entry previously opened by
4807 @code{.cfi_startproc}, and emits it to @code{.eh_frame}.
4808
4809 @subsection @code{.cfi_personality @var{encoding} [, @var{exp}]}
4810 @cindex @code{cfi_personality} directive
4811 @code{.cfi_personality} defines personality routine and its encoding.
4812 @var{encoding} must be a constant determining how the personality
4813 should be encoded. If it is 255 (@code{DW_EH_PE_omit}), second
4814 argument is not present, otherwise second argument should be
4815 a constant or a symbol name. When using indirect encodings,
4816 the symbol provided should be the location where personality
4817 can be loaded from, not the personality routine itself.
4818 The default after @code{.cfi_startproc} is @code{.cfi_personality 0xff},
4819 no personality routine.
4820
4821 @subsection @code{.cfi_personality_id @var{id}}
4822 @cindex @code{cfi_personality_id} directive
4823 @code{cfi_personality_id} defines a personality routine by its index as
4824 defined in a compact unwinding format.
4825 Only valid when generating compact EH frames (i.e.
4826 with @code{.cfi_sections eh_frame_entry}.
4827
4828 @subsection @code{.cfi_fde_data [@var{opcode1} [, @dots{}]]}
4829 @cindex @code{cfi_fde_data} directive
4830 @code{cfi_fde_data} is used to describe the compact unwind opcodes to be
4831 used for the current function. These are emitted inline in the
4832 @code{.eh_frame_entry} section if small enough and there is no LSDA, or
4833 in the @code{.gnu.extab} section otherwise.
4834 Only valid when generating compact EH frames (i.e.
4835 with @code{.cfi_sections eh_frame_entry}.
4836
4837 @subsection @code{.cfi_lsda @var{encoding} [, @var{exp}]}
4838 @code{.cfi_lsda} defines LSDA and its encoding.
4839 @var{encoding} must be a constant determining how the LSDA
4840 should be encoded. If it is 255 (@code{DW_EH_PE_omit}), the second
4841 argument is not present, otherwise the second argument should be a constant
4842 or a symbol name. The default after @code{.cfi_startproc} is @code{.cfi_lsda 0xff},
4843 meaning that no LSDA is present.
4844
4845 @subsection @code{.cfi_inline_lsda} [@var{align}]
4846 @code{.cfi_inline_lsda} marks the start of a LSDA data section and
4847 switches to the corresponding @code{.gnu.extab} section.
4848 Must be preceded by a CFI block containing a @code{.cfi_lsda} directive.
4849 Only valid when generating compact EH frames (i.e.
4850 with @code{.cfi_sections eh_frame_entry}.
4851
4852 The table header and unwinding opcodes will be generated at this point,
4853 so that they are immediately followed by the LSDA data. The symbol
4854 referenced by the @code{.cfi_lsda} directive should still be defined
4855 in case a fallback FDE based encoding is used. The LSDA data is terminated
4856 by a section directive.
4857
4858 The optional @var{align} argument specifies the alignment required.
4859 The alignment is specified as a power of two, as with the
4860 @code{.p2align} directive.
4861
4862 @subsection @code{.cfi_def_cfa @var{register}, @var{offset}}
4863 @code{.cfi_def_cfa} defines a rule for computing CFA as: @i{take
4864 address from @var{register} and add @var{offset} to it}.
4865
4866 @subsection @code{.cfi_def_cfa_register @var{register}}
4867 @code{.cfi_def_cfa_register} modifies a rule for computing CFA. From
4868 now on @var{register} will be used instead of the old one. Offset
4869 remains the same.
4870
4871 @subsection @code{.cfi_def_cfa_offset @var{offset}}
4872 @code{.cfi_def_cfa_offset} modifies a rule for computing CFA. Register
4873 remains the same, but @var{offset} is new. Note that it is the
4874 absolute offset that will be added to a defined register to compute
4875 CFA address.
4876
4877 @subsection @code{.cfi_adjust_cfa_offset @var{offset}}
4878 Same as @code{.cfi_def_cfa_offset} but @var{offset} is a relative
4879 value that is added/subtracted from the previous offset.
4880
4881 @subsection @code{.cfi_offset @var{register}, @var{offset}}
4882 Previous value of @var{register} is saved at offset @var{offset} from
4883 CFA.
4884
4885 @subsection @code{.cfi_val_offset @var{register}, @var{offset}}
4886 Previous value of @var{register} is CFA + @var{offset}.
4887
4888 @subsection @code{.cfi_rel_offset @var{register}, @var{offset}}
4889 Previous value of @var{register} is saved at offset @var{offset} from
4890 the current CFA register. This is transformed to @code{.cfi_offset}
4891 using the known displacement of the CFA register from the CFA.
4892 This is often easier to use, because the number will match the
4893 code it's annotating.
4894
4895 @subsection @code{.cfi_register @var{register1}, @var{register2}}
4896 Previous value of @var{register1} is saved in register @var{register2}.
4897
4898 @subsection @code{.cfi_restore @var{register}}
4899 @code{.cfi_restore} says that the rule for @var{register} is now the
4900 same as it was at the beginning of the function, after all initial
4901 instruction added by @code{.cfi_startproc} were executed.
4902
4903 @subsection @code{.cfi_undefined @var{register}}
4904 From now on the previous value of @var{register} can't be restored anymore.
4905
4906 @subsection @code{.cfi_same_value @var{register}}
4907 Current value of @var{register} is the same like in the previous frame,
4908 i.e. no restoration needed.
4909
4910 @subsection @code{.cfi_remember_state} and @code{.cfi_restore_state}
4911 @code{.cfi_remember_state} pushes the set of rules for every register onto an
4912 implicit stack, while @code{.cfi_restore_state} pops them off the stack and
4913 places them in the current row. This is useful for situations where you have
4914 multiple @code{.cfi_*} directives that need to be undone due to the control
4915 flow of the program. For example, we could have something like this (assuming
4916 the CFA is the value of @code{rbp}):
4917
4918 @smallexample
4919 je label
4920 popq %rbx
4921 .cfi_restore %rbx
4922 popq %r12
4923 .cfi_restore %r12
4924 popq %rbp
4925 .cfi_restore %rbp
4926 .cfi_def_cfa %rsp, 8
4927 ret
4928 label:
4929 /* Do something else */
4930 @end smallexample
4931
4932 Here, we want the @code{.cfi} directives to affect only the rows corresponding
4933 to the instructions before @code{label}. This means we'd have to add multiple
4934 @code{.cfi} directives after @code{label} to recreate the original save
4935 locations of the registers, as well as setting the CFA back to the value of
4936 @code{rbp}. This would be clumsy, and result in a larger binary size. Instead,
4937 we can write:
4938
4939 @smallexample
4940 je label
4941 popq %rbx
4942 .cfi_remember_state
4943 .cfi_restore %rbx
4944 popq %r12
4945 .cfi_restore %r12
4946 popq %rbp
4947 .cfi_restore %rbp
4948 .cfi_def_cfa %rsp, 8
4949 ret
4950 label:
4951 .cfi_restore_state
4952 /* Do something else */
4953 @end smallexample
4954
4955 That way, the rules for the instructions after @code{label} will be the same
4956 as before the first @code{.cfi_restore} without having to use multiple
4957 @code{.cfi} directives.
4958
4959 @subsection @code{.cfi_return_column @var{register}}
4960 Change return column @var{register}, i.e. the return address is either
4961 directly in @var{register} or can be accessed by rules for @var{register}.
4962
4963 @subsection @code{.cfi_signal_frame}
4964 Mark current function as signal trampoline.
4965
4966 @subsection @code{.cfi_window_save}
4967 SPARC register window has been saved.
4968
4969 @subsection @code{.cfi_escape} @var{expression}[, @dots{}]
4970 Allows the user to add arbitrary bytes to the unwind info. One
4971 might use this to add OS-specific CFI opcodes, or generic CFI
4972 opcodes that GAS does not yet support.
4973
4974 @subsection @code{.cfi_val_encoded_addr @var{register}, @var{encoding}, @var{label}}
4975 The current value of @var{register} is @var{label}. The value of @var{label}
4976 will be encoded in the output file according to @var{encoding}; see the
4977 description of @code{.cfi_personality} for details on this encoding.
4978
4979 The usefulness of equating a register to a fixed label is probably
4980 limited to the return address register. Here, it can be useful to
4981 mark a code segment that has only one return address which is reached
4982 by a direct branch and no copy of the return address exists in memory
4983 or another register.
4984
4985 @node Comm
4986 @section @code{.comm @var{symbol} , @var{length} }
4987
4988 @cindex @code{comm} directive
4989 @cindex symbol, common
4990 @code{.comm} declares a common symbol named @var{symbol}. When linking, a
4991 common symbol in one object file may be merged with a defined or common symbol
4992 of the same name in another object file. If @code{@value{LD}} does not see a
4993 definition for the symbol--just one or more common symbols--then it will
4994 allocate @var{length} bytes of uninitialized memory. @var{length} must be an
4995 absolute expression. If @code{@value{LD}} sees multiple common symbols with
4996 the same name, and they do not all have the same size, it will allocate space
4997 using the largest size.
4998
4999 @ifset COFF-ELF
5000 When using ELF or (as a GNU extension) PE, the @code{.comm} directive takes
5001 an optional third argument. This is the desired alignment of the symbol,
5002 specified for ELF as a byte boundary (for example, an alignment of 16 means
5003 that the least significant 4 bits of the address should be zero), and for PE
5004 as a power of two (for example, an alignment of 5 means aligned to a 32-byte
5005 boundary). The alignment must be an absolute expression, and it must be a
5006 power of two. If @code{@value{LD}} allocates uninitialized memory for the
5007 common symbol, it will use the alignment when placing the symbol. If no
5008 alignment is specified, @command{@value{AS}} will set the alignment to the
5009 largest power of two less than or equal to the size of the symbol, up to a
5010 maximum of 16 on ELF, or the default section alignment of 4 on PE@footnote{This
5011 is not the same as the executable image file alignment controlled by @code{@value{LD}}'s
5012 @samp{--section-alignment} option; image file sections in PE are aligned to
5013 multiples of 4096, which is far too large an alignment for ordinary variables.
5014 It is rather the default alignment for (non-debug) sections within object
5015 (@samp{*.o}) files, which are less strictly aligned.}.
5016 @end ifset
5017
5018 @ifset HPPA
5019 The syntax for @code{.comm} differs slightly on the HPPA. The syntax is
5020 @samp{@var{symbol} .comm, @var{length}}; @var{symbol} is optional.
5021 @end ifset
5022
5023 @node Data
5024 @section @code{.data @var{subsection}}
5025
5026 @cindex @code{data} directive
5027 @code{.data} tells @command{@value{AS}} to assemble the following statements onto the
5028 end of the data subsection numbered @var{subsection} (which is an
5029 absolute expression). If @var{subsection} is omitted, it defaults
5030 to zero.
5031
5032 @ifset COFF
5033 @node Def
5034 @section @code{.def @var{name}}
5035
5036 @cindex @code{def} directive
5037 @cindex COFF symbols, debugging
5038 @cindex debugging COFF symbols
5039 Begin defining debugging information for a symbol @var{name}; the
5040 definition extends until the @code{.endef} directive is encountered.
5041 @ifset BOUT
5042
5043 This directive is only observed when @command{@value{AS}} is configured for COFF
5044 format output; when producing @code{b.out}, @samp{.def} is recognized,
5045 but ignored.
5046 @end ifset
5047 @end ifset
5048
5049 @ifset aout-bout
5050 @node Desc
5051 @section @code{.desc @var{symbol}, @var{abs-expression}}
5052
5053 @cindex @code{desc} directive
5054 @cindex COFF symbol descriptor
5055 @cindex symbol descriptor, COFF
5056 This directive sets the descriptor of the symbol (@pxref{Symbol Attributes})
5057 to the low 16 bits of an absolute expression.
5058
5059 @ifset COFF
5060 The @samp{.desc} directive is not available when @command{@value{AS}} is
5061 configured for COFF output; it is only for @code{a.out} or @code{b.out}
5062 object format. For the sake of compatibility, @command{@value{AS}} accepts
5063 it, but produces no output, when configured for COFF.
5064 @end ifset
5065 @end ifset
5066
5067 @ifset COFF
5068 @node Dim
5069 @section @code{.dim}
5070
5071 @cindex @code{dim} directive
5072 @cindex COFF auxiliary symbol information
5073 @cindex auxiliary symbol information, COFF
5074 This directive is generated by compilers to include auxiliary debugging
5075 information in the symbol table. It is only permitted inside
5076 @code{.def}/@code{.endef} pairs.
5077 @ifset BOUT
5078
5079 @samp{.dim} is only meaningful when generating COFF format output; when
5080 @command{@value{AS}} is generating @code{b.out}, it accepts this directive but
5081 ignores it.
5082 @end ifset
5083 @end ifset
5084
5085 @node Double
5086 @section @code{.double @var{flonums}}
5087
5088 @cindex @code{double} directive
5089 @cindex floating point numbers (double)
5090 @code{.double} expects zero or more flonums, separated by commas. It
5091 assembles floating point numbers.
5092 @ifset GENERIC
5093 The exact kind of floating point numbers emitted depends on how
5094 @command{@value{AS}} is configured. @xref{Machine Dependencies}.
5095 @end ifset
5096 @ifclear GENERIC
5097 @ifset IEEEFLOAT
5098 On the @value{TARGET} family @samp{.double} emits 64-bit floating-point numbers
5099 in @sc{ieee} format.
5100 @end ifset
5101 @end ifclear
5102
5103 @node Eject
5104 @section @code{.eject}
5105
5106 @cindex @code{eject} directive
5107 @cindex new page, in listings
5108 @cindex page, in listings
5109 @cindex listing control: new page
5110 Force a page break at this point, when generating assembly listings.
5111
5112 @node Else
5113 @section @code{.else}
5114
5115 @cindex @code{else} directive
5116 @code{.else} is part of the @command{@value{AS}} support for conditional
5117 assembly; see @ref{If,,@code{.if}}. It marks the beginning of a section
5118 of code to be assembled if the condition for the preceding @code{.if}
5119 was false.
5120
5121 @node Elseif
5122 @section @code{.elseif}
5123
5124 @cindex @code{elseif} directive
5125 @code{.elseif} is part of the @command{@value{AS}} support for conditional
5126 assembly; see @ref{If,,@code{.if}}. It is shorthand for beginning a new
5127 @code{.if} block that would otherwise fill the entire @code{.else} section.
5128
5129 @node End
5130 @section @code{.end}
5131
5132 @cindex @code{end} directive
5133 @code{.end} marks the end of the assembly file. @command{@value{AS}} does not
5134 process anything in the file past the @code{.end} directive.
5135
5136 @ifset COFF
5137 @node Endef
5138 @section @code{.endef}
5139
5140 @cindex @code{endef} directive
5141 This directive flags the end of a symbol definition begun with
5142 @code{.def}.
5143 @ifset BOUT
5144
5145 @samp{.endef} is only meaningful when generating COFF format output; if
5146 @command{@value{AS}} is configured to generate @code{b.out}, it accepts this
5147 directive but ignores it.
5148 @end ifset
5149 @end ifset
5150
5151 @node Endfunc
5152 @section @code{.endfunc}
5153 @cindex @code{endfunc} directive
5154 @code{.endfunc} marks the end of a function specified with @code{.func}.
5155
5156 @node Endif
5157 @section @code{.endif}
5158
5159 @cindex @code{endif} directive
5160 @code{.endif} is part of the @command{@value{AS}} support for conditional assembly;
5161 it marks the end of a block of code that is only assembled
5162 conditionally. @xref{If,,@code{.if}}.
5163
5164 @node Equ
5165 @section @code{.equ @var{symbol}, @var{expression}}
5166
5167 @cindex @code{equ} directive
5168 @cindex assigning values to symbols
5169 @cindex symbols, assigning values to
5170 This directive sets the value of @var{symbol} to @var{expression}.
5171 It is synonymous with @samp{.set}; see @ref{Set,,@code{.set}}.
5172
5173 @ifset HPPA
5174 The syntax for @code{equ} on the HPPA is
5175 @samp{@var{symbol} .equ @var{expression}}.
5176 @end ifset
5177
5178 @ifset Z80
5179 The syntax for @code{equ} on the Z80 is
5180 @samp{@var{symbol} equ @var{expression}}.
5181 On the Z80 it is an error if @var{symbol} is already defined,
5182 but the symbol is not protected from later redefinition.
5183 Compare @ref{Equiv}.
5184 @end ifset
5185
5186 @node Equiv
5187 @section @code{.equiv @var{symbol}, @var{expression}}
5188 @cindex @code{equiv} directive
5189 The @code{.equiv} directive is like @code{.equ} and @code{.set}, except that
5190 the assembler will signal an error if @var{symbol} is already defined. Note a
5191 symbol which has been referenced but not actually defined is considered to be
5192 undefined.
5193
5194 Except for the contents of the error message, this is roughly equivalent to
5195 @smallexample
5196 .ifdef SYM
5197 .err
5198 .endif
5199 .equ SYM,VAL
5200 @end smallexample
5201 plus it protects the symbol from later redefinition.
5202
5203 @node Eqv
5204 @section @code{.eqv @var{symbol}, @var{expression}}
5205 @cindex @code{eqv} directive
5206 The @code{.eqv} directive is like @code{.equiv}, but no attempt is made to
5207 evaluate the expression or any part of it immediately. Instead each time
5208 the resulting symbol is used in an expression, a snapshot of its current
5209 value is taken.
5210
5211 @node Err
5212 @section @code{.err}
5213 @cindex @code{err} directive
5214 If @command{@value{AS}} assembles a @code{.err} directive, it will print an error
5215 message and, unless the @option{-Z} option was used, it will not generate an
5216 object file. This can be used to signal an error in conditionally compiled code.
5217
5218 @node Error
5219 @section @code{.error "@var{string}"}
5220 @cindex error directive
5221
5222 Similarly to @code{.err}, this directive emits an error, but you can specify a
5223 string that will be emitted as the error message. If you don't specify the
5224 message, it defaults to @code{".error directive invoked in source file"}.
5225 @xref{Errors, ,Error and Warning Messages}.
5226
5227 @smallexample
5228 .error "This code has not been assembled and tested."
5229 @end smallexample
5230
5231 @node Exitm
5232 @section @code{.exitm}
5233 Exit early from the current macro definition. @xref{Macro}.
5234
5235 @node Extern
5236 @section @code{.extern}
5237
5238 @cindex @code{extern} directive
5239 @code{.extern} is accepted in the source program---for compatibility
5240 with other assemblers---but it is ignored. @command{@value{AS}} treats
5241 all undefined symbols as external.
5242
5243 @node Fail
5244 @section @code{.fail @var{expression}}
5245
5246 @cindex @code{fail} directive
5247 Generates an error or a warning. If the value of the @var{expression} is 500
5248 or more, @command{@value{AS}} will print a warning message. If the value is less
5249 than 500, @command{@value{AS}} will print an error message. The message will
5250 include the value of @var{expression}. This can occasionally be useful inside
5251 complex nested macros or conditional assembly.
5252
5253 @node File
5254 @section @code{.file}
5255 @cindex @code{file} directive
5256
5257 @ifclear no-file-dir
5258 There are two different versions of the @code{.file} directive. Targets
5259 that support DWARF2 line number information use the DWARF2 version of
5260 @code{.file}. Other targets use the default version.
5261
5262 @subheading Default Version
5263
5264 @cindex logical file name
5265 @cindex file name, logical
5266 This version of the @code{.file} directive tells @command{@value{AS}} that we
5267 are about to start a new logical file. The syntax is:
5268
5269 @smallexample
5270 .file @var{string}
5271 @end smallexample
5272
5273 @var{string} is the new file name. In general, the filename is
5274 recognized whether or not it is surrounded by quotes @samp{"}; but if you wish
5275 to specify an empty file name, you must give the quotes--@code{""}. This
5276 statement may go away in future: it is only recognized to be compatible with
5277 old @command{@value{AS}} programs.
5278
5279 @subheading DWARF2 Version
5280 @end ifclear
5281
5282 When emitting DWARF2 line number information, @code{.file} assigns filenames
5283 to the @code{.debug_line} file name table. The syntax is:
5284
5285 @smallexample
5286 .file @var{fileno} @var{filename}
5287 @end smallexample
5288
5289 The @var{fileno} operand should be a unique positive integer to use as the
5290 index of the entry in the table. The @var{filename} operand is a C string
5291 literal.
5292
5293 The detail of filename indices is exposed to the user because the filename
5294 table is shared with the @code{.debug_info} section of the DWARF2 debugging
5295 information, and thus the user must know the exact indices that table
5296 entries will have.
5297
5298 @node Fill
5299 @section @code{.fill @var{repeat} , @var{size} , @var{value}}
5300
5301 @cindex @code{fill} directive
5302 @cindex writing patterns in memory
5303 @cindex patterns, writing in memory
5304 @var{repeat}, @var{size} and @var{value} are absolute expressions.
5305 This emits @var{repeat} copies of @var{size} bytes. @var{Repeat}
5306 may be zero or more. @var{Size} may be zero or more, but if it is
5307 more than 8, then it is deemed to have the value 8, compatible with
5308 other people's assemblers. The contents of each @var{repeat} bytes
5309 is taken from an 8-byte number. The highest order 4 bytes are
5310 zero. The lowest order 4 bytes are @var{value} rendered in the
5311 byte-order of an integer on the computer @command{@value{AS}} is assembling for.
5312 Each @var{size} bytes in a repetition is taken from the lowest order
5313 @var{size} bytes of this number. Again, this bizarre behavior is
5314 compatible with other people's assemblers.
5315
5316 @var{size} and @var{value} are optional.
5317 If the second comma and @var{value} are absent, @var{value} is
5318 assumed zero. If the first comma and following tokens are absent,
5319 @var{size} is assumed to be 1.
5320
5321 @node Float
5322 @section @code{.float @var{flonums}}
5323
5324 @cindex floating point numbers (single)
5325 @cindex @code{float} directive
5326 This directive assembles zero or more flonums, separated by commas. It
5327 has the same effect as @code{.single}.
5328 @ifset GENERIC
5329 The exact kind of floating point numbers emitted depends on how
5330 @command{@value{AS}} is configured.
5331 @xref{Machine Dependencies}.
5332 @end ifset
5333 @ifclear GENERIC
5334 @ifset IEEEFLOAT
5335 On the @value{TARGET} family, @code{.float} emits 32-bit floating point numbers
5336 in @sc{ieee} format.
5337 @end ifset
5338 @end ifclear
5339
5340 @node Func
5341 @section @code{.func @var{name}[,@var{label}]}
5342 @cindex @code{func} directive
5343 @code{.func} emits debugging information to denote function @var{name}, and
5344 is ignored unless the file is assembled with debugging enabled.
5345 Only @samp{--gstabs[+]} is currently supported.
5346 @var{label} is the entry point of the function and if omitted @var{name}
5347 prepended with the @samp{leading char} is used.
5348 @samp{leading char} is usually @code{_} or nothing, depending on the target.
5349 All functions are currently defined to have @code{void} return type.
5350 The function must be terminated with @code{.endfunc}.
5351
5352 @node Global
5353 @section @code{.global @var{symbol}}, @code{.globl @var{symbol}}
5354
5355 @cindex @code{global} directive
5356 @cindex symbol, making visible to linker
5357 @code{.global} makes the symbol visible to @code{@value{LD}}. If you define
5358 @var{symbol} in your partial program, its value is made available to
5359 other partial programs that are linked with it. Otherwise,
5360 @var{symbol} takes its attributes from a symbol of the same name
5361 from another file linked into the same program.
5362
5363 Both spellings (@samp{.globl} and @samp{.global}) are accepted, for
5364 compatibility with other assemblers.
5365
5366 @ifset HPPA
5367 On the HPPA, @code{.global} is not always enough to make it accessible to other
5368 partial programs. You may need the HPPA-only @code{.EXPORT} directive as well.
5369 @xref{HPPA Directives, ,HPPA Assembler Directives}.
5370 @end ifset
5371
5372 @ifset ELF
5373 @node Gnu_attribute
5374 @section @code{.gnu_attribute @var{tag},@var{value}}
5375 Record a @sc{gnu} object attribute for this file. @xref{Object Attributes}.
5376
5377 @node Hidden
5378 @section @code{.hidden @var{names}}
5379
5380 @cindex @code{hidden} directive
5381 @cindex visibility
5382 This is one of the ELF visibility directives. The other two are
5383 @code{.internal} (@pxref{Internal,,@code{.internal}}) and
5384 @code{.protected} (@pxref{Protected,,@code{.protected}}).
5385
5386 This directive overrides the named symbols default visibility (which is set by
5387 their binding: local, global or weak). The directive sets the visibility to
5388 @code{hidden} which means that the symbols are not visible to other components.
5389 Such symbols are always considered to be @code{protected} as well.
5390 @end ifset
5391
5392 @node hword
5393 @section @code{.hword @var{expressions}}
5394
5395 @cindex @code{hword} directive
5396 @cindex integers, 16-bit
5397 @cindex numbers, 16-bit
5398 @cindex sixteen bit integers
5399 This expects zero or more @var{expressions}, and emits
5400 a 16 bit number for each.
5401
5402 @ifset GENERIC
5403 This directive is a synonym for @samp{.short}; depending on the target
5404 architecture, it may also be a synonym for @samp{.word}.
5405 @end ifset
5406 @ifclear GENERIC
5407 @ifset W32
5408 This directive is a synonym for @samp{.short}.
5409 @end ifset
5410 @ifset W16
5411 This directive is a synonym for both @samp{.short} and @samp{.word}.
5412 @end ifset
5413 @end ifclear
5414
5415 @node Ident
5416 @section @code{.ident}
5417
5418 @cindex @code{ident} directive
5419
5420 This directive is used by some assemblers to place tags in object files. The
5421 behavior of this directive varies depending on the target. When using the
5422 a.out object file format, @command{@value{AS}} simply accepts the directive for
5423 source-file compatibility with existing assemblers, but does not emit anything
5424 for it. When using COFF, comments are emitted to the @code{.comment} or
5425 @code{.rdata} section, depending on the target. When using ELF, comments are
5426 emitted to the @code{.comment} section.
5427
5428 @node If
5429 @section @code{.if @var{absolute expression}}
5430
5431 @cindex conditional assembly
5432 @cindex @code{if} directive
5433 @code{.if} marks the beginning of a section of code which is only
5434 considered part of the source program being assembled if the argument
5435 (which must be an @var{absolute expression}) is non-zero. The end of
5436 the conditional section of code must be marked by @code{.endif}
5437 (@pxref{Endif,,@code{.endif}}); optionally, you may include code for the
5438 alternative condition, flagged by @code{.else} (@pxref{Else,,@code{.else}}).
5439 If you have several conditions to check, @code{.elseif} may be used to avoid
5440 nesting blocks if/else within each subsequent @code{.else} block.
5441
5442 The following variants of @code{.if} are also supported:
5443 @table @code
5444 @cindex @code{ifdef} directive
5445 @item .ifdef @var{symbol}
5446 Assembles the following section of code if the specified @var{symbol}
5447 has been defined. Note a symbol which has been referenced but not yet defined
5448 is considered to be undefined.
5449
5450 @cindex @code{ifb} directive
5451 @item .ifb @var{text}
5452 Assembles the following section of code if the operand is blank (empty).
5453
5454 @cindex @code{ifc} directive
5455 @item .ifc @var{string1},@var{string2}
5456 Assembles the following section of code if the two strings are the same. The
5457 strings may be optionally quoted with single quotes. If they are not quoted,
5458 the first string stops at the first comma, and the second string stops at the
5459 end of the line. Strings which contain whitespace should be quoted. The
5460 string comparison is case sensitive.
5461
5462 @cindex @code{ifeq} directive
5463 @item .ifeq @var{absolute expression}
5464 Assembles the following section of code if the argument is zero.
5465
5466 @cindex @code{ifeqs} directive
5467 @item .ifeqs @var{string1},@var{string2}
5468 Another form of @code{.ifc}. The strings must be quoted using double quotes.
5469
5470 @cindex @code{ifge} directive
5471 @item .ifge @var{absolute expression}
5472 Assembles the following section of code if the argument is greater than or
5473 equal to zero.
5474
5475 @cindex @code{ifgt} directive
5476 @item .ifgt @var{absolute expression}
5477 Assembles the following section of code if the argument is greater than zero.
5478
5479 @cindex @code{ifle} directive
5480 @item .ifle @var{absolute expression}
5481 Assembles the following section of code if the argument is less than or equal
5482 to zero.
5483
5484 @cindex @code{iflt} directive
5485 @item .iflt @var{absolute expression}
5486 Assembles the following section of code if the argument is less than zero.
5487
5488 @cindex @code{ifnb} directive
5489 @item .ifnb @var{text}
5490 Like @code{.ifb}, but the sense of the test is reversed: this assembles the
5491 following section of code if the operand is non-blank (non-empty).
5492
5493 @cindex @code{ifnc} directive
5494 @item .ifnc @var{string1},@var{string2}.
5495 Like @code{.ifc}, but the sense of the test is reversed: this assembles the
5496 following section of code if the two strings are not the same.
5497
5498 @cindex @code{ifndef} directive
5499 @cindex @code{ifnotdef} directive
5500 @item .ifndef @var{symbol}
5501 @itemx .ifnotdef @var{symbol}
5502 Assembles the following section of code if the specified @var{symbol}
5503 has not been defined. Both spelling variants are equivalent. Note a symbol
5504 which has been referenced but not yet defined is considered to be undefined.
5505
5506 @cindex @code{ifne} directive
5507 @item .ifne @var{absolute expression}
5508 Assembles the following section of code if the argument is not equal to zero
5509 (in other words, this is equivalent to @code{.if}).
5510
5511 @cindex @code{ifnes} directive
5512 @item .ifnes @var{string1},@var{string2}
5513 Like @code{.ifeqs}, but the sense of the test is reversed: this assembles the
5514 following section of code if the two strings are not the same.
5515 @end table
5516
5517 @node Incbin
5518 @section @code{.incbin "@var{file}"[,@var{skip}[,@var{count}]]}
5519
5520 @cindex @code{incbin} directive
5521 @cindex binary files, including
5522 The @code{incbin} directive includes @var{file} verbatim at the current
5523 location. You can control the search paths used with the @samp{-I} command-line
5524 option (@pxref{Invoking,,Command-Line Options}). Quotation marks are required
5525 around @var{file}.
5526
5527 The @var{skip} argument skips a number of bytes from the start of the
5528 @var{file}. The @var{count} argument indicates the maximum number of bytes to
5529 read. Note that the data is not aligned in any way, so it is the user's
5530 responsibility to make sure that proper alignment is provided both before and
5531 after the @code{incbin} directive.
5532
5533 @node Include
5534 @section @code{.include "@var{file}"}
5535
5536 @cindex @code{include} directive
5537 @cindex supporting files, including
5538 @cindex files, including
5539 This directive provides a way to include supporting files at specified
5540 points in your source program. The code from @var{file} is assembled as
5541 if it followed the point of the @code{.include}; when the end of the
5542 included file is reached, assembly of the original file continues. You
5543 can control the search paths used with the @samp{-I} command-line option
5544 (@pxref{Invoking,,Command-Line Options}). Quotation marks are required
5545 around @var{file}.
5546
5547 @node Int
5548 @section @code{.int @var{expressions}}
5549
5550 @cindex @code{int} directive
5551 @cindex integers, 32-bit
5552 Expect zero or more @var{expressions}, of any section, separated by commas.
5553 For each expression, emit a number that, at run time, is the value of that
5554 expression. The byte order and bit size of the number depends on what kind
5555 of target the assembly is for.
5556
5557 @ifclear GENERIC
5558 @ifset H8
5559 On most forms of the H8/300, @code{.int} emits 16-bit
5560 integers. On the H8/300H and the Renesas SH, however, @code{.int} emits
5561 32-bit integers.
5562 @end ifset
5563 @end ifclear
5564
5565 @ifset ELF
5566 @node Internal
5567 @section @code{.internal @var{names}}
5568
5569 @cindex @code{internal} directive
5570 @cindex visibility
5571 This is one of the ELF visibility directives. The other two are
5572 @code{.hidden} (@pxref{Hidden,,@code{.hidden}}) and
5573 @code{.protected} (@pxref{Protected,,@code{.protected}}).
5574
5575 This directive overrides the named symbols default visibility (which is set by
5576 their binding: local, global or weak). The directive sets the visibility to
5577 @code{internal} which means that the symbols are considered to be @code{hidden}
5578 (i.e., not visible to other components), and that some extra, processor specific
5579 processing must also be performed upon the symbols as well.
5580 @end ifset
5581
5582 @node Irp
5583 @section @code{.irp @var{symbol},@var{values}}@dots{}
5584
5585 @cindex @code{irp} directive
5586 Evaluate a sequence of statements assigning different values to @var{symbol}.
5587 The sequence of statements starts at the @code{.irp} directive, and is
5588 terminated by an @code{.endr} directive. For each @var{value}, @var{symbol} is
5589 set to @var{value}, and the sequence of statements is assembled. If no
5590 @var{value} is listed, the sequence of statements is assembled once, with
5591 @var{symbol} set to the null string. To refer to @var{symbol} within the
5592 sequence of statements, use @var{\symbol}.
5593
5594 For example, assembling
5595
5596 @example
5597 .irp param,1,2,3
5598 move d\param,sp@@-
5599 .endr
5600 @end example
5601
5602 is equivalent to assembling
5603
5604 @example
5605 move d1,sp@@-
5606 move d2,sp@@-
5607 move d3,sp@@-
5608 @end example
5609
5610 For some caveats with the spelling of @var{symbol}, see also @ref{Macro}.
5611
5612 @node Irpc
5613 @section @code{.irpc @var{symbol},@var{values}}@dots{}
5614
5615 @cindex @code{irpc} directive
5616 Evaluate a sequence of statements assigning different values to @var{symbol}.
5617 The sequence of statements starts at the @code{.irpc} directive, and is
5618 terminated by an @code{.endr} directive. For each character in @var{value},
5619 @var{symbol} is set to the character, and the sequence of statements is
5620 assembled. If no @var{value} is listed, the sequence of statements is
5621 assembled once, with @var{symbol} set to the null string. To refer to
5622 @var{symbol} within the sequence of statements, use @var{\symbol}.
5623
5624 For example, assembling
5625
5626 @example
5627 .irpc param,123
5628 move d\param,sp@@-
5629 .endr
5630 @end example
5631
5632 is equivalent to assembling
5633
5634 @example
5635 move d1,sp@@-
5636 move d2,sp@@-
5637 move d3,sp@@-
5638 @end example
5639
5640 For some caveats with the spelling of @var{symbol}, see also the discussion
5641 at @xref{Macro}.
5642
5643 @node Lcomm
5644 @section @code{.lcomm @var{symbol} , @var{length}}
5645
5646 @cindex @code{lcomm} directive
5647 @cindex local common symbols
5648 @cindex symbols, local common
5649 Reserve @var{length} (an absolute expression) bytes for a local common
5650 denoted by @var{symbol}. The section and value of @var{symbol} are
5651 those of the new local common. The addresses are allocated in the bss
5652 section, so that at run-time the bytes start off zeroed. @var{Symbol}
5653 is not declared global (@pxref{Global,,@code{.global}}), so is normally
5654 not visible to @code{@value{LD}}.
5655
5656 @ifset GENERIC
5657 Some targets permit a third argument to be used with @code{.lcomm}. This
5658 argument specifies the desired alignment of the symbol in the bss section.
5659 @end ifset
5660
5661 @ifset HPPA
5662 The syntax for @code{.lcomm} differs slightly on the HPPA. The syntax is
5663 @samp{@var{symbol} .lcomm, @var{length}}; @var{symbol} is optional.
5664 @end ifset
5665
5666 @node Lflags
5667 @section @code{.lflags}
5668
5669 @cindex @code{lflags} directive (ignored)
5670 @command{@value{AS}} accepts this directive, for compatibility with other
5671 assemblers, but ignores it.
5672
5673 @ifclear no-line-dir
5674 @node Line
5675 @section @code{.line @var{line-number}}
5676
5677 @cindex @code{line} directive
5678 @cindex logical line number
5679 @ifset aout-bout
5680 Change the logical line number. @var{line-number} must be an absolute
5681 expression. The next line has that logical line number. Therefore any other
5682 statements on the current line (after a statement separator character) are
5683 reported as on logical line number @var{line-number} @minus{} 1. One day
5684 @command{@value{AS}} will no longer support this directive: it is recognized only
5685 for compatibility with existing assembler programs.
5686 @end ifset
5687
5688 Even though this is a directive associated with the @code{a.out} or
5689 @code{b.out} object-code formats, @command{@value{AS}} still recognizes it
5690 when producing COFF output, and treats @samp{.line} as though it
5691 were the COFF @samp{.ln} @emph{if} it is found outside a
5692 @code{.def}/@code{.endef} pair.
5693
5694 Inside a @code{.def}, @samp{.line} is, instead, one of the directives
5695 used by compilers to generate auxiliary symbol information for
5696 debugging.
5697 @end ifclear
5698
5699 @node Linkonce
5700 @section @code{.linkonce [@var{type}]}
5701 @cindex COMDAT
5702 @cindex @code{linkonce} directive
5703 @cindex common sections
5704 Mark the current section so that the linker only includes a single copy of it.
5705 This may be used to include the same section in several different object files,
5706 but ensure that the linker will only include it once in the final output file.
5707 The @code{.linkonce} pseudo-op must be used for each instance of the section.
5708 Duplicate sections are detected based on the section name, so it should be
5709 unique.
5710
5711 This directive is only supported by a few object file formats; as of this
5712 writing, the only object file format which supports it is the Portable
5713 Executable format used on Windows NT.
5714
5715 The @var{type} argument is optional. If specified, it must be one of the
5716 following strings. For example:
5717 @smallexample
5718 .linkonce same_size
5719 @end smallexample
5720 Not all types may be supported on all object file formats.
5721
5722 @table @code
5723 @item discard
5724 Silently discard duplicate sections. This is the default.
5725
5726 @item one_only
5727 Warn if there are duplicate sections, but still keep only one copy.
5728
5729 @item same_size
5730 Warn if any of the duplicates have different sizes.
5731
5732 @item same_contents
5733 Warn if any of the duplicates do not have exactly the same contents.
5734 @end table
5735
5736 @node List
5737 @section @code{.list}
5738
5739 @cindex @code{list} directive
5740 @cindex listing control, turning on
5741 Control (in conjunction with the @code{.nolist} directive) whether or
5742 not assembly listings are generated. These two directives maintain an
5743 internal counter (which is zero initially). @code{.list} increments the
5744 counter, and @code{.nolist} decrements it. Assembly listings are
5745 generated whenever the counter is greater than zero.
5746
5747 By default, listings are disabled. When you enable them (with the
5748 @samp{-a} command line option; @pxref{Invoking,,Command-Line Options}),
5749 the initial value of the listing counter is one.
5750
5751 @node Ln
5752 @section @code{.ln @var{line-number}}
5753
5754 @cindex @code{ln} directive
5755 @ifclear no-line-dir
5756 @samp{.ln} is a synonym for @samp{.line}.
5757 @end ifclear
5758 @ifset no-line-dir
5759 Tell @command{@value{AS}} to change the logical line number. @var{line-number}
5760 must be an absolute expression. The next line has that logical
5761 line number, so any other statements on the current line (after a
5762 statement separator character @code{;}) are reported as on logical
5763 line number @var{line-number} @minus{} 1.
5764 @ifset BOUT
5765
5766 This directive is accepted, but ignored, when @command{@value{AS}} is
5767 configured for @code{b.out}; its effect is only associated with COFF
5768 output format.
5769 @end ifset
5770 @end ifset
5771
5772 @node Loc
5773 @section @code{.loc @var{fileno} @var{lineno} [@var{column}] [@var{options}]}
5774 @cindex @code{loc} directive
5775 When emitting DWARF2 line number information,
5776 the @code{.loc} directive will add a row to the @code{.debug_line} line
5777 number matrix corresponding to the immediately following assembly
5778 instruction. The @var{fileno}, @var{lineno}, and optional @var{column}
5779 arguments will be applied to the @code{.debug_line} state machine before
5780 the row is added.
5781
5782 The @var{options} are a sequence of the following tokens in any order:
5783
5784 @table @code
5785 @item basic_block
5786 This option will set the @code{basic_block} register in the
5787 @code{.debug_line} state machine to @code{true}.
5788
5789 @item prologue_end
5790 This option will set the @code{prologue_end} register in the
5791 @code{.debug_line} state machine to @code{true}.
5792
5793 @item epilogue_begin
5794 This option will set the @code{epilogue_begin} register in the
5795 @code{.debug_line} state machine to @code{true}.
5796
5797 @item is_stmt @var{value}
5798 This option will set the @code{is_stmt} register in the
5799 @code{.debug_line} state machine to @code{value}, which must be
5800 either 0 or 1.
5801
5802 @item isa @var{value}
5803 This directive will set the @code{isa} register in the @code{.debug_line}
5804 state machine to @var{value}, which must be an unsigned integer.
5805
5806 @item discriminator @var{value}
5807 This directive will set the @code{discriminator} register in the @code{.debug_line}
5808 state machine to @var{value}, which must be an unsigned integer.
5809
5810 @end table
5811
5812 @node Loc_mark_labels
5813 @section @code{.loc_mark_labels @var{enable}}
5814 @cindex @code{loc_mark_labels} directive
5815 When emitting DWARF2 line number information,
5816 the @code{.loc_mark_labels} directive makes the assembler emit an entry
5817 to the @code{.debug_line} line number matrix with the @code{basic_block}
5818 register in the state machine set whenever a code label is seen.
5819 The @var{enable} argument should be either 1 or 0, to enable or disable
5820 this function respectively.
5821
5822 @ifset ELF
5823 @node Local
5824 @section @code{.local @var{names}}
5825
5826 @cindex @code{local} directive
5827 This directive, which is available for ELF targets, marks each symbol in
5828 the comma-separated list of @code{names} as a local symbol so that it
5829 will not be externally visible. If the symbols do not already exist,
5830 they will be created.
5831
5832 For targets where the @code{.lcomm} directive (@pxref{Lcomm}) does not
5833 accept an alignment argument, which is the case for most ELF targets,
5834 the @code{.local} directive can be used in combination with @code{.comm}
5835 (@pxref{Comm}) to define aligned local common data.
5836 @end ifset
5837
5838 @node Long
5839 @section @code{.long @var{expressions}}
5840
5841 @cindex @code{long} directive
5842 @code{.long} is the same as @samp{.int}. @xref{Int,,@code{.int}}.
5843
5844 @ignore
5845 @c no one seems to know what this is for or whether this description is
5846 @c what it really ought to do
5847 @node Lsym
5848 @section @code{.lsym @var{symbol}, @var{expression}}
5849
5850 @cindex @code{lsym} directive
5851 @cindex symbol, not referenced in assembly
5852 @code{.lsym} creates a new symbol named @var{symbol}, but does not put it in
5853 the hash table, ensuring it cannot be referenced by name during the
5854 rest of the assembly. This sets the attributes of the symbol to be
5855 the same as the expression value:
5856 @smallexample
5857 @var{other} = @var{descriptor} = 0
5858 @var{type} = @r{(section of @var{expression})}
5859 @var{value} = @var{expression}
5860 @end smallexample
5861 @noindent
5862 The new symbol is not flagged as external.
5863 @end ignore
5864
5865 @node Macro
5866 @section @code{.macro}
5867
5868 @cindex macros
5869 The commands @code{.macro} and @code{.endm} allow you to define macros that
5870 generate assembly output. For example, this definition specifies a macro
5871 @code{sum} that puts a sequence of numbers into memory:
5872
5873 @example
5874 .macro sum from=0, to=5
5875 .long \from
5876 .if \to-\from
5877 sum "(\from+1)",\to
5878 .endif
5879 .endm
5880 @end example
5881
5882 @noindent
5883 With that definition, @samp{SUM 0,5} is equivalent to this assembly input:
5884
5885 @example
5886 .long 0
5887 .long 1
5888 .long 2
5889 .long 3
5890 .long 4
5891 .long 5
5892 @end example
5893
5894 @ftable @code
5895 @item .macro @var{macname}
5896 @itemx .macro @var{macname} @var{macargs} @dots{}
5897 @cindex @code{macro} directive
5898 Begin the definition of a macro called @var{macname}. If your macro
5899 definition requires arguments, specify their names after the macro name,
5900 separated by commas or spaces. You can qualify the macro argument to
5901 indicate whether all invocations must specify a non-blank value (through
5902 @samp{:@code{req}}), or whether it takes all of the remaining arguments
5903 (through @samp{:@code{vararg}}). You can supply a default value for any
5904 macro argument by following the name with @samp{=@var{deflt}}. You
5905 cannot define two macros with the same @var{macname} unless it has been
5906 subject to the @code{.purgem} directive (@pxref{Purgem}) between the two
5907 definitions. For example, these are all valid @code{.macro} statements:
5908
5909 @table @code
5910 @item .macro comm
5911 Begin the definition of a macro called @code{comm}, which takes no
5912 arguments.
5913
5914 @item .macro plus1 p, p1
5915 @itemx .macro plus1 p p1
5916 Either statement begins the definition of a macro called @code{plus1},
5917 which takes two arguments; within the macro definition, write
5918 @samp{\p} or @samp{\p1} to evaluate the arguments.
5919
5920 @item .macro reserve_str p1=0 p2
5921 Begin the definition of a macro called @code{reserve_str}, with two
5922 arguments. The first argument has a default value, but not the second.
5923 After the definition is complete, you can call the macro either as
5924 @samp{reserve_str @var{a},@var{b}} (with @samp{\p1} evaluating to
5925 @var{a} and @samp{\p2} evaluating to @var{b}), or as @samp{reserve_str
5926 ,@var{b}} (with @samp{\p1} evaluating as the default, in this case
5927 @samp{0}, and @samp{\p2} evaluating to @var{b}).
5928
5929 @item .macro m p1:req, p2=0, p3:vararg
5930 Begin the definition of a macro called @code{m}, with at least three
5931 arguments. The first argument must always have a value specified, but
5932 not the second, which instead has a default value. The third formal
5933 will get assigned all remaining arguments specified at invocation time.
5934
5935 When you call a macro, you can specify the argument values either by
5936 position, or by keyword. For example, @samp{sum 9,17} is equivalent to
5937 @samp{sum to=17, from=9}.
5938
5939 @end table
5940
5941 Note that since each of the @var{macargs} can be an identifier exactly
5942 as any other one permitted by the target architecture, there may be
5943 occasional problems if the target hand-crafts special meanings to certain
5944 characters when they occur in a special position. For example, if the colon
5945 (@code{:}) is generally permitted to be part of a symbol name, but the
5946 architecture specific code special-cases it when occurring as the final
5947 character of a symbol (to denote a label), then the macro parameter
5948 replacement code will have no way of knowing that and consider the whole
5949 construct (including the colon) an identifier, and check only this
5950 identifier for being the subject to parameter substitution. So for example
5951 this macro definition:
5952
5953 @example
5954 .macro label l
5955 \l:
5956 .endm
5957 @end example
5958
5959 might not work as expected. Invoking @samp{label foo} might not create a label
5960 called @samp{foo} but instead just insert the text @samp{\l:} into the
5961 assembler source, probably generating an error about an unrecognised
5962 identifier.
5963
5964 Similarly problems might occur with the period character (@samp{.})
5965 which is often allowed inside opcode names (and hence identifier names). So
5966 for example constructing a macro to build an opcode from a base name and a
5967 length specifier like this:
5968
5969 @example
5970 .macro opcode base length
5971 \base.\length
5972 .endm
5973 @end example
5974
5975 and invoking it as @samp{opcode store l} will not create a @samp{store.l}
5976 instruction but instead generate some kind of error as the assembler tries to
5977 interpret the text @samp{\base.\length}.
5978
5979 There are several possible ways around this problem:
5980
5981 @table @code
5982 @item Insert white space
5983 If it is possible to use white space characters then this is the simplest
5984 solution. eg:
5985
5986 @example
5987 .macro label l
5988 \l :
5989 .endm
5990 @end example
5991
5992 @item Use @samp{\()}
5993 The string @samp{\()} can be used to separate the end of a macro argument from
5994 the following text. eg:
5995
5996 @example
5997 .macro opcode base length
5998 \base\().\length
5999 .endm
6000 @end example
6001
6002 @item Use the alternate macro syntax mode
6003 In the alternative macro syntax mode the ampersand character (@samp{&}) can be
6004 used as a separator. eg:
6005
6006 @example
6007 .altmacro
6008 .macro label l
6009 l&:
6010 .endm
6011 @end example
6012 @end table
6013
6014 Note: this problem of correctly identifying string parameters to pseudo ops
6015 also applies to the identifiers used in @code{.irp} (@pxref{Irp})
6016 and @code{.irpc} (@pxref{Irpc}) as well.
6017
6018 @item .endm
6019 @cindex @code{endm} directive
6020 Mark the end of a macro definition.
6021
6022 @item .exitm
6023 @cindex @code{exitm} directive
6024 Exit early from the current macro definition.
6025
6026 @cindex number of macros executed
6027 @cindex macros, count executed
6028 @item \@@
6029 @command{@value{AS}} maintains a counter of how many macros it has
6030 executed in this pseudo-variable; you can copy that number to your
6031 output with @samp{\@@}, but @emph{only within a macro definition}.
6032
6033 @item LOCAL @var{name} [ , @dots{} ]
6034 @emph{Warning: @code{LOCAL} is only available if you select ``alternate
6035 macro syntax'' with @samp{--alternate} or @code{.altmacro}.}
6036 @xref{Altmacro,,@code{.altmacro}}.
6037 @end ftable
6038
6039 @node MRI
6040 @section @code{.mri @var{val}}
6041
6042 @cindex @code{mri} directive
6043 @cindex MRI mode, temporarily
6044 If @var{val} is non-zero, this tells @command{@value{AS}} to enter MRI mode. If
6045 @var{val} is zero, this tells @command{@value{AS}} to exit MRI mode. This change
6046 affects code assembled until the next @code{.mri} directive, or until the end
6047 of the file. @xref{M, MRI mode, MRI mode}.
6048
6049 @node Noaltmacro
6050 @section @code{.noaltmacro}
6051 Disable alternate macro mode. @xref{Altmacro}.
6052
6053 @node Nolist
6054 @section @code{.nolist}
6055
6056 @cindex @code{nolist} directive
6057 @cindex listing control, turning off
6058 Control (in conjunction with the @code{.list} directive) whether or
6059 not assembly listings are generated. These two directives maintain an
6060 internal counter (which is zero initially). @code{.list} increments the
6061 counter, and @code{.nolist} decrements it. Assembly listings are
6062 generated whenever the counter is greater than zero.
6063
6064 @node Octa
6065 @section @code{.octa @var{bignums}}
6066
6067 @c FIXME: double size emitted for "octa" on i960, others? Or warn?
6068 @cindex @code{octa} directive
6069 @cindex integer, 16-byte
6070 @cindex sixteen byte integer
6071 This directive expects zero or more bignums, separated by commas. For each
6072 bignum, it emits a 16-byte integer.
6073
6074 The term ``octa'' comes from contexts in which a ``word'' is two bytes;
6075 hence @emph{octa}-word for 16 bytes.
6076
6077 @node Offset
6078 @section @code{.offset @var{loc}}
6079
6080 @cindex @code{offset} directive
6081 Set the location counter to @var{loc} in the absolute section. @var{loc} must
6082 be an absolute expression. This directive may be useful for defining
6083 symbols with absolute values. Do not confuse it with the @code{.org}
6084 directive.
6085
6086 @node Org
6087 @section @code{.org @var{new-lc} , @var{fill}}
6088
6089 @cindex @code{org} directive
6090 @cindex location counter, advancing
6091 @cindex advancing location counter
6092 @cindex current address, advancing
6093 Advance the location counter of the current section to
6094 @var{new-lc}. @var{new-lc} is either an absolute expression or an
6095 expression with the same section as the current subsection. That is,
6096 you can't use @code{.org} to cross sections: if @var{new-lc} has the
6097 wrong section, the @code{.org} directive is ignored. To be compatible
6098 with former assemblers, if the section of @var{new-lc} is absolute,
6099 @command{@value{AS}} issues a warning, then pretends the section of @var{new-lc}
6100 is the same as the current subsection.
6101
6102 @code{.org} may only increase the location counter, or leave it
6103 unchanged; you cannot use @code{.org} to move the location counter
6104 backwards.
6105
6106 @c double negative used below "not undefined" because this is a specific
6107 @c reference to "undefined" (as SEG_UNKNOWN is called in this manual)
6108 @c section. doc@cygnus.com 18feb91
6109 Because @command{@value{AS}} tries to assemble programs in one pass, @var{new-lc}
6110 may not be undefined. If you really detest this restriction we eagerly await
6111 a chance to share your improved assembler.
6112
6113 Beware that the origin is relative to the start of the section, not
6114 to the start of the subsection. This is compatible with other
6115 people's assemblers.
6116
6117 When the location counter (of the current subsection) is advanced, the
6118 intervening bytes are filled with @var{fill} which should be an
6119 absolute expression. If the comma and @var{fill} are omitted,
6120 @var{fill} defaults to zero.
6121
6122 @node P2align
6123 @section @code{.p2align[wl] @var{abs-expr}, @var{abs-expr}, @var{abs-expr}}
6124
6125 @cindex padding the location counter given a power of two
6126 @cindex @code{p2align} directive
6127 Pad the location counter (in the current subsection) to a particular
6128 storage boundary. The first expression (which must be absolute) is the
6129 number of low-order zero bits the location counter must have after
6130 advancement. For example @samp{.p2align 3} advances the location
6131 counter until it a multiple of 8. If the location counter is already a
6132 multiple of 8, no change is needed.
6133
6134 The second expression (also absolute) gives the fill value to be stored in the
6135 padding bytes. It (and the comma) may be omitted. If it is omitted, the
6136 padding bytes are normally zero. However, on some systems, if the section is
6137 marked as containing code and the fill value is omitted, the space is filled
6138 with no-op instructions.
6139
6140 The third expression is also absolute, and is also optional. If it is present,
6141 it is the maximum number of bytes that should be skipped by this alignment
6142 directive. If doing the alignment would require skipping more bytes than the
6143 specified maximum, then the alignment is not done at all. You can omit the
6144 fill value (the second argument) entirely by simply using two commas after the
6145 required alignment; this can be useful if you want the alignment to be filled
6146 with no-op instructions when appropriate.
6147
6148 @cindex @code{p2alignw} directive
6149 @cindex @code{p2alignl} directive
6150 The @code{.p2alignw} and @code{.p2alignl} directives are variants of the
6151 @code{.p2align} directive. The @code{.p2alignw} directive treats the fill
6152 pattern as a two byte word value. The @code{.p2alignl} directives treats the
6153 fill pattern as a four byte longword value. For example, @code{.p2alignw
6154 2,0x368d} will align to a multiple of 4. If it skips two bytes, they will be
6155 filled in with the value 0x368d (the exact placement of the bytes depends upon
6156 the endianness of the processor). If it skips 1 or 3 bytes, the fill value is
6157 undefined.
6158
6159 @ifset ELF
6160 @node PopSection
6161 @section @code{.popsection}
6162
6163 @cindex @code{popsection} directive
6164 @cindex Section Stack
6165 This is one of the ELF section stack manipulation directives. The others are
6166 @code{.section} (@pxref{Section}), @code{.subsection} (@pxref{SubSection}),
6167 @code{.pushsection} (@pxref{PushSection}), and @code{.previous}
6168 (@pxref{Previous}).
6169
6170 This directive replaces the current section (and subsection) with the top
6171 section (and subsection) on the section stack. This section is popped off the
6172 stack.
6173 @end ifset
6174
6175 @ifset ELF
6176 @node Previous
6177 @section @code{.previous}
6178
6179 @cindex @code{previous} directive
6180 @cindex Section Stack
6181 This is one of the ELF section stack manipulation directives. The others are
6182 @code{.section} (@pxref{Section}), @code{.subsection} (@pxref{SubSection}),
6183 @code{.pushsection} (@pxref{PushSection}), and @code{.popsection}
6184 (@pxref{PopSection}).
6185
6186 This directive swaps the current section (and subsection) with most recently
6187 referenced section/subsection pair prior to this one. Multiple
6188 @code{.previous} directives in a row will flip between two sections (and their
6189 subsections). For example:
6190
6191 @smallexample
6192 .section A
6193 .subsection 1
6194 .word 0x1234
6195 .subsection 2
6196 .word 0x5678
6197 .previous
6198 .word 0x9abc
6199 @end smallexample
6200
6201 Will place 0x1234 and 0x9abc into subsection 1 and 0x5678 into subsection 2 of
6202 section A. Whilst:
6203
6204 @smallexample
6205 .section A
6206 .subsection 1
6207 # Now in section A subsection 1
6208 .word 0x1234
6209 .section B
6210 .subsection 0
6211 # Now in section B subsection 0
6212 .word 0x5678
6213 .subsection 1
6214 # Now in section B subsection 1
6215 .word 0x9abc
6216 .previous
6217 # Now in section B subsection 0
6218 .word 0xdef0
6219 @end smallexample
6220
6221 Will place 0x1234 into section A, 0x5678 and 0xdef0 into subsection 0 of
6222 section B and 0x9abc into subsection 1 of section B.
6223
6224 In terms of the section stack, this directive swaps the current section with
6225 the top section on the section stack.
6226 @end ifset
6227
6228 @node Print
6229 @section @code{.print @var{string}}
6230
6231 @cindex @code{print} directive
6232 @command{@value{AS}} will print @var{string} on the standard output during
6233 assembly. You must put @var{string} in double quotes.
6234
6235 @ifset ELF
6236 @node Protected
6237 @section @code{.protected @var{names}}
6238
6239 @cindex @code{protected} directive
6240 @cindex visibility
6241 This is one of the ELF visibility directives. The other two are
6242 @code{.hidden} (@pxref{Hidden}) and @code{.internal} (@pxref{Internal}).
6243
6244 This directive overrides the named symbols default visibility (which is set by
6245 their binding: local, global or weak). The directive sets the visibility to
6246 @code{protected} which means that any references to the symbols from within the
6247 components that defines them must be resolved to the definition in that
6248 component, even if a definition in another component would normally preempt
6249 this.
6250 @end ifset
6251
6252 @node Psize
6253 @section @code{.psize @var{lines} , @var{columns}}
6254
6255 @cindex @code{psize} directive
6256 @cindex listing control: paper size
6257 @cindex paper size, for listings
6258 Use this directive to declare the number of lines---and, optionally, the
6259 number of columns---to use for each page, when generating listings.
6260
6261 If you do not use @code{.psize}, listings use a default line-count
6262 of 60. You may omit the comma and @var{columns} specification; the
6263 default width is 200 columns.
6264
6265 @command{@value{AS}} generates formfeeds whenever the specified number of
6266 lines is exceeded (or whenever you explicitly request one, using
6267 @code{.eject}).
6268
6269 If you specify @var{lines} as @code{0}, no formfeeds are generated save
6270 those explicitly specified with @code{.eject}.
6271
6272 @node Purgem
6273 @section @code{.purgem @var{name}}
6274
6275 @cindex @code{purgem} directive
6276 Undefine the macro @var{name}, so that later uses of the string will not be
6277 expanded. @xref{Macro}.
6278
6279 @ifset ELF
6280 @node PushSection
6281 @section @code{.pushsection @var{name} [, @var{subsection}] [, "@var{flags}"[, @@@var{type}[,@var{arguments}]]]}
6282
6283 @cindex @code{pushsection} directive
6284 @cindex Section Stack
6285 This is one of the ELF section stack manipulation directives. The others are
6286 @code{.section} (@pxref{Section}), @code{.subsection} (@pxref{SubSection}),
6287 @code{.popsection} (@pxref{PopSection}), and @code{.previous}
6288 (@pxref{Previous}).
6289
6290 This directive pushes the current section (and subsection) onto the
6291 top of the section stack, and then replaces the current section and
6292 subsection with @code{name} and @code{subsection}. The optional
6293 @code{flags}, @code{type} and @code{arguments} are treated the same
6294 as in the @code{.section} (@pxref{Section}) directive.
6295 @end ifset
6296
6297 @node Quad
6298 @section @code{.quad @var{bignums}}
6299
6300 @cindex @code{quad} directive
6301 @code{.quad} expects zero or more bignums, separated by commas. For
6302 each bignum, it emits
6303 @ifclear bignum-16
6304 an 8-byte integer. If the bignum won't fit in 8 bytes, it prints a
6305 warning message; and just takes the lowest order 8 bytes of the bignum.
6306 @cindex eight-byte integer
6307 @cindex integer, 8-byte
6308
6309 The term ``quad'' comes from contexts in which a ``word'' is two bytes;
6310 hence @emph{quad}-word for 8 bytes.
6311 @end ifclear
6312 @ifset bignum-16
6313 a 16-byte integer. If the bignum won't fit in 16 bytes, it prints a
6314 warning message; and just takes the lowest order 16 bytes of the bignum.
6315 @cindex sixteen-byte integer
6316 @cindex integer, 16-byte
6317 @end ifset
6318
6319 @node Reloc
6320 @section @code{.reloc @var{offset}, @var{reloc_name}[, @var{expression}]}
6321
6322 @cindex @code{reloc} directive
6323 Generate a relocation at @var{offset} of type @var{reloc_name} with value
6324 @var{expression}. If @var{offset} is a number, the relocation is generated in
6325 the current section. If @var{offset} is an expression that resolves to a
6326 symbol plus offset, the relocation is generated in the given symbol's section.
6327 @var{expression}, if present, must resolve to a symbol plus addend or to an
6328 absolute value, but note that not all targets support an addend. e.g. ELF REL
6329 targets such as i386 store an addend in the section contents rather than in the
6330 relocation. This low level interface does not support addends stored in the
6331 section.
6332
6333 @node Rept
6334 @section @code{.rept @var{count}}
6335
6336 @cindex @code{rept} directive
6337 Repeat the sequence of lines between the @code{.rept} directive and the next
6338 @code{.endr} directive @var{count} times.
6339
6340 For example, assembling
6341
6342 @example
6343 .rept 3
6344 .long 0
6345 .endr
6346 @end example
6347
6348 is equivalent to assembling
6349
6350 @example
6351 .long 0
6352 .long 0
6353 .long 0
6354 @end example
6355
6356 @node Sbttl
6357 @section @code{.sbttl "@var{subheading}"}
6358
6359 @cindex @code{sbttl} directive
6360 @cindex subtitles for listings
6361 @cindex listing control: subtitle
6362 Use @var{subheading} as the title (third line, immediately after the
6363 title line) when generating assembly listings.
6364
6365 This directive affects subsequent pages, as well as the current page if
6366 it appears within ten lines of the top of a page.
6367
6368 @ifset COFF
6369 @node Scl
6370 @section @code{.scl @var{class}}
6371
6372 @cindex @code{scl} directive
6373 @cindex symbol storage class (COFF)
6374 @cindex COFF symbol storage class
6375 Set the storage-class value for a symbol. This directive may only be
6376 used inside a @code{.def}/@code{.endef} pair. Storage class may flag
6377 whether a symbol is static or external, or it may record further
6378 symbolic debugging information.
6379 @ifset BOUT
6380
6381 The @samp{.scl} directive is primarily associated with COFF output; when
6382 configured to generate @code{b.out} output format, @command{@value{AS}}
6383 accepts this directive but ignores it.
6384 @end ifset
6385 @end ifset
6386
6387 @ifset COFF-ELF
6388 @node Section
6389 @section @code{.section @var{name}}
6390
6391 @cindex named section
6392 Use the @code{.section} directive to assemble the following code into a section
6393 named @var{name}.
6394
6395 This directive is only supported for targets that actually support arbitrarily
6396 named sections; on @code{a.out} targets, for example, it is not accepted, even
6397 with a standard @code{a.out} section name.
6398
6399 @ifset COFF
6400 @ifset ELF
6401 @c only print the extra heading if both COFF and ELF are set
6402 @subheading COFF Version
6403 @end ifset
6404
6405 @cindex @code{section} directive (COFF version)
6406 For COFF targets, the @code{.section} directive is used in one of the following
6407 ways:
6408
6409 @smallexample
6410 .section @var{name}[, "@var{flags}"]
6411 .section @var{name}[, @var{subsection}]
6412 @end smallexample
6413
6414 If the optional argument is quoted, it is taken as flags to use for the
6415 section. Each flag is a single character. The following flags are recognized:
6416
6417 @table @code
6418 @item b
6419 bss section (uninitialized data)
6420 @item n
6421 section is not loaded
6422 @item w
6423 writable section
6424 @item d
6425 data section
6426 @item e
6427 exclude section from linking
6428 @item r
6429 read-only section
6430 @item x
6431 executable section
6432 @item s
6433 shared section (meaningful for PE targets)
6434 @item a
6435 ignored. (For compatibility with the ELF version)
6436 @item y
6437 section is not readable (meaningful for PE targets)
6438 @item 0-9
6439 single-digit power-of-two section alignment (GNU extension)
6440 @end table
6441
6442 If no flags are specified, the default flags depend upon the section name. If
6443 the section name is not recognized, the default will be for the section to be
6444 loaded and writable. Note the @code{n} and @code{w} flags remove attributes
6445 from the section, rather than adding them, so if they are used on their own it
6446 will be as if no flags had been specified at all.
6447
6448 If the optional argument to the @code{.section} directive is not quoted, it is
6449 taken as a subsection number (@pxref{Sub-Sections}).
6450 @end ifset
6451
6452 @ifset ELF
6453 @ifset COFF
6454 @c only print the extra heading if both COFF and ELF are set
6455 @subheading ELF Version
6456 @end ifset
6457
6458 @cindex Section Stack
6459 This is one of the ELF section stack manipulation directives. The others are
6460 @code{.subsection} (@pxref{SubSection}), @code{.pushsection}
6461 (@pxref{PushSection}), @code{.popsection} (@pxref{PopSection}), and
6462 @code{.previous} (@pxref{Previous}).
6463
6464 @cindex @code{section} directive (ELF version)
6465 For ELF targets, the @code{.section} directive is used like this:
6466
6467 @smallexample
6468 .section @var{name} [, "@var{flags}"[, @@@var{type}[,@var{flag_specific_arguments}]]]
6469 @end smallexample
6470
6471 @anchor{Section Name Substitutions}
6472 @kindex --sectname-subst
6473 @cindex section name substitution
6474 If the @samp{--sectname-subst} command-line option is provided, the @var{name}
6475 argument may contain a substitution sequence. Only @code{%S} is supported
6476 at the moment, and substitutes the current section name. For example:
6477
6478 @smallexample
6479 .macro exception_code
6480 .section %S.exception
6481 [exception code here]
6482 .previous
6483 .endm
6484
6485 .text
6486 [code]
6487 exception_code
6488 [...]
6489
6490 .section .init
6491 [init code]
6492 exception_code
6493 [...]
6494 @end smallexample
6495
6496 The two @code{exception_code} invocations above would create the
6497 @code{.text.exception} and @code{.init.exception} sections respectively.
6498 This is useful e.g. to discriminate between ancillary sections that are
6499 tied to setup code to be discarded after use from ancillary sections that
6500 need to stay resident without having to define multiple @code{exception_code}
6501 macros just for that purpose.
6502
6503 The optional @var{flags} argument is a quoted string which may contain any
6504 combination of the following characters:
6505
6506 @table @code
6507 @item a
6508 section is allocatable
6509 @item e
6510 section is excluded from executable and shared library.
6511 @item w
6512 section is writable
6513 @item x
6514 section is executable
6515 @item M
6516 section is mergeable
6517 @item S
6518 section contains zero terminated strings
6519 @item G
6520 section is a member of a section group
6521 @item T
6522 section is used for thread-local-storage
6523 @item ?
6524 section is a member of the previously-current section's group, if any
6525 @item @code{<number>}
6526 a numeric value indicating the bits to be set in the ELF section header's flags
6527 field. Note - if one or more of the alphabetic characters described above is
6528 also included in the flags field, their bit values will be ORed into the
6529 resulting value.
6530 @item @code{<target specific>}
6531 some targets extend this list with their own flag characters
6532 @end table
6533
6534 Note - once a section's flags have been set they cannot be changed. There are
6535 a few exceptions to this rule however. Processor and application specific
6536 flags can be added to an already defined section. The @code{.interp},
6537 @code{.strtab} and @code{.symtab} sections can have the allocate flag
6538 (@code{a}) set after they are initially defined, and the @code{.note-GNU-stack}
6539 section may have the executable (@code{x}) flag added.
6540
6541 The optional @var{type} argument may contain one of the following constants:
6542
6543 @table @code
6544 @item @@progbits
6545 section contains data
6546 @item @@nobits
6547 section does not contain data (i.e., section only occupies space)
6548 @item @@note
6549 section contains data which is used by things other than the program
6550 @item @@init_array
6551 section contains an array of pointers to init functions
6552 @item @@fini_array
6553 section contains an array of pointers to finish functions
6554 @item @@preinit_array
6555 section contains an array of pointers to pre-init functions
6556 @item @@@code{<number>}
6557 a numeric value to be set as the ELF section header's type field.
6558 @item @@@code{<target specific>}
6559 some targets extend this list with their own types
6560 @end table
6561
6562 Many targets only support the first three section types. The type may be
6563 enclosed in double quotes if necessary.
6564
6565 Note on targets where the @code{@@} character is the start of a comment (eg
6566 ARM) then another character is used instead. For example the ARM port uses the
6567 @code{%} character.
6568
6569 Note - some sections, eg @code{.text} and @code{.data} are considered to be
6570 special and have fixed types. Any attempt to declare them with a different
6571 type will generate an error from the assembler.
6572
6573 If @var{flags} contains the @code{M} symbol then the @var{type} argument must
6574 be specified as well as an extra argument---@var{entsize}---like this:
6575
6576 @smallexample
6577 .section @var{name} , "@var{flags}"M, @@@var{type}, @var{entsize}
6578 @end smallexample
6579
6580 Sections with the @code{M} flag but not @code{S} flag must contain fixed size
6581 constants, each @var{entsize} octets long. Sections with both @code{M} and
6582 @code{S} must contain zero terminated strings where each character is
6583 @var{entsize} bytes long. The linker may remove duplicates within sections with
6584 the same name, same entity size and same flags. @var{entsize} must be an
6585 absolute expression. For sections with both @code{M} and @code{S}, a string
6586 which is a suffix of a larger string is considered a duplicate. Thus
6587 @code{"def"} will be merged with @code{"abcdef"}; A reference to the first
6588 @code{"def"} will be changed to a reference to @code{"abcdef"+3}.
6589
6590 If @var{flags} contains the @code{G} symbol then the @var{type} argument must
6591 be present along with an additional field like this:
6592
6593 @smallexample
6594 .section @var{name} , "@var{flags}"G, @@@var{type}, @var{GroupName}[, @var{linkage}]
6595 @end smallexample
6596
6597 The @var{GroupName} field specifies the name of the section group to which this
6598 particular section belongs. The optional linkage field can contain:
6599
6600 @table @code
6601 @item comdat
6602 indicates that only one copy of this section should be retained
6603 @item .gnu.linkonce
6604 an alias for comdat
6605 @end table
6606
6607 Note: if both the @var{M} and @var{G} flags are present then the fields for
6608 the Merge flag should come first, like this:
6609
6610 @smallexample
6611 .section @var{name} , "@var{flags}"MG, @@@var{type}, @var{entsize}, @var{GroupName}[, @var{linkage}]
6612 @end smallexample
6613
6614 If @var{flags} contains the @code{?} symbol then it may not also contain the
6615 @code{G} symbol and the @var{GroupName} or @var{linkage} fields should not be
6616 present. Instead, @code{?} says to consider the section that's current before
6617 this directive. If that section used @code{G}, then the new section will use
6618 @code{G} with those same @var{GroupName} and @var{linkage} fields implicitly.
6619 If not, then the @code{?} symbol has no effect.
6620
6621 If no flags are specified, the default flags depend upon the section name. If
6622 the section name is not recognized, the default will be for the section to have
6623 none of the above flags: it will not be allocated in memory, nor writable, nor
6624 executable. The section will contain data.
6625
6626 For ELF targets, the assembler supports another type of @code{.section}
6627 directive for compatibility with the Solaris assembler:
6628
6629 @smallexample
6630 .section "@var{name}"[, @var{flags}...]
6631 @end smallexample
6632
6633 Note that the section name is quoted. There may be a sequence of comma
6634 separated flags:
6635
6636 @table @code
6637 @item #alloc
6638 section is allocatable
6639 @item #write
6640 section is writable
6641 @item #execinstr
6642 section is executable
6643 @item #exclude
6644 section is excluded from executable and shared library.
6645 @item #tls
6646 section is used for thread local storage
6647 @end table
6648
6649 This directive replaces the current section and subsection. See the
6650 contents of the gas testsuite directory @code{gas/testsuite/gas/elf} for
6651 some examples of how this directive and the other section stack directives
6652 work.
6653 @end ifset
6654 @end ifset
6655
6656 @node Set
6657 @section @code{.set @var{symbol}, @var{expression}}
6658
6659 @cindex @code{set} directive
6660 @cindex symbol value, setting
6661 Set the value of @var{symbol} to @var{expression}. This
6662 changes @var{symbol}'s value and type to conform to
6663 @var{expression}. If @var{symbol} was flagged as external, it remains
6664 flagged (@pxref{Symbol Attributes}).
6665
6666 You may @code{.set} a symbol many times in the same assembly provided that the
6667 values given to the symbol are constants. Values that are based on expressions
6668 involving other symbols are allowed, but some targets may restrict this to only
6669 being done once per assembly. This is because those targets do not set the
6670 addresses of symbols at assembly time, but rather delay the assignment until a
6671 final link is performed. This allows the linker a chance to change the code in
6672 the files, changing the location of, and the relative distance between, various
6673 different symbols.
6674
6675 If you @code{.set} a global symbol, the value stored in the object
6676 file is the last value stored into it.
6677
6678 @ifset Z80
6679 On Z80 @code{set} is a real instruction, use
6680 @samp{@var{symbol} defl @var{expression}} instead.
6681 @end ifset
6682
6683 @node Short
6684 @section @code{.short @var{expressions}}
6685
6686 @cindex @code{short} directive
6687 @ifset GENERIC
6688 @code{.short} is normally the same as @samp{.word}.
6689 @xref{Word,,@code{.word}}.
6690
6691 In some configurations, however, @code{.short} and @code{.word} generate
6692 numbers of different lengths. @xref{Machine Dependencies}.
6693 @end ifset
6694 @ifclear GENERIC
6695 @ifset W16
6696 @code{.short} is the same as @samp{.word}. @xref{Word,,@code{.word}}.
6697 @end ifset
6698 @ifset W32
6699 This expects zero or more @var{expressions}, and emits
6700 a 16 bit number for each.
6701 @end ifset
6702 @end ifclear
6703
6704 @node Single
6705 @section @code{.single @var{flonums}}
6706
6707 @cindex @code{single} directive
6708 @cindex floating point numbers (single)
6709 This directive assembles zero or more flonums, separated by commas. It
6710 has the same effect as @code{.float}.
6711 @ifset GENERIC
6712 The exact kind of floating point numbers emitted depends on how
6713 @command{@value{AS}} is configured. @xref{Machine Dependencies}.
6714 @end ifset
6715 @ifclear GENERIC
6716 @ifset IEEEFLOAT
6717 On the @value{TARGET} family, @code{.single} emits 32-bit floating point
6718 numbers in @sc{ieee} format.
6719 @end ifset
6720 @end ifclear
6721
6722 @ifset COFF-ELF
6723 @node Size
6724 @section @code{.size}
6725
6726 This directive is used to set the size associated with a symbol.
6727
6728 @ifset COFF
6729 @ifset ELF
6730 @c only print the extra heading if both COFF and ELF are set
6731 @subheading COFF Version
6732 @end ifset
6733
6734 @cindex @code{size} directive (COFF version)
6735 For COFF targets, the @code{.size} directive is only permitted inside
6736 @code{.def}/@code{.endef} pairs. It is used like this:
6737
6738 @smallexample
6739 .size @var{expression}
6740 @end smallexample
6741
6742 @ifset BOUT
6743 @samp{.size} is only meaningful when generating COFF format output; when
6744 @command{@value{AS}} is generating @code{b.out}, it accepts this directive but
6745 ignores it.
6746 @end ifset
6747 @end ifset
6748
6749 @ifset ELF
6750 @ifset COFF
6751 @c only print the extra heading if both COFF and ELF are set
6752 @subheading ELF Version
6753 @end ifset
6754
6755 @cindex @code{size} directive (ELF version)
6756 For ELF targets, the @code{.size} directive is used like this:
6757
6758 @smallexample
6759 .size @var{name} , @var{expression}
6760 @end smallexample
6761
6762 This directive sets the size associated with a symbol @var{name}.
6763 The size in bytes is computed from @var{expression} which can make use of label
6764 arithmetic. This directive is typically used to set the size of function
6765 symbols.
6766 @end ifset
6767 @end ifset
6768
6769 @ifclear no-space-dir
6770 @node Skip
6771 @section @code{.skip @var{size} , @var{fill}}
6772
6773 @cindex @code{skip} directive
6774 @cindex filling memory
6775 This directive emits @var{size} bytes, each of value @var{fill}. Both
6776 @var{size} and @var{fill} are absolute expressions. If the comma and
6777 @var{fill} are omitted, @var{fill} is assumed to be zero. This is the same as
6778 @samp{.space}.
6779 @end ifclear
6780
6781 @node Sleb128
6782 @section @code{.sleb128 @var{expressions}}
6783
6784 @cindex @code{sleb128} directive
6785 @var{sleb128} stands for ``signed little endian base 128.'' This is a
6786 compact, variable length representation of numbers used by the DWARF
6787 symbolic debugging format. @xref{Uleb128, ,@code{.uleb128}}.
6788
6789 @ifclear no-space-dir
6790 @node Space
6791 @section @code{.space @var{size} , @var{fill}}
6792
6793 @cindex @code{space} directive
6794 @cindex filling memory
6795 This directive emits @var{size} bytes, each of value @var{fill}. Both
6796 @var{size} and @var{fill} are absolute expressions. If the comma
6797 and @var{fill} are omitted, @var{fill} is assumed to be zero. This is the same
6798 as @samp{.skip}.
6799
6800 @ifset HPPA
6801 @quotation
6802 @emph{Warning:} @code{.space} has a completely different meaning for HPPA
6803 targets; use @code{.block} as a substitute. See @cite{HP9000 Series 800
6804 Assembly Language Reference Manual} (HP 92432-90001) for the meaning of the
6805 @code{.space} directive. @xref{HPPA Directives,,HPPA Assembler Directives},
6806 for a summary.
6807 @end quotation
6808 @end ifset
6809 @end ifclear
6810
6811 @ifset have-stabs
6812 @node Stab
6813 @section @code{.stabd, .stabn, .stabs}
6814
6815 @cindex symbolic debuggers, information for
6816 @cindex @code{stab@var{x}} directives
6817 There are three directives that begin @samp{.stab}.
6818 All emit symbols (@pxref{Symbols}), for use by symbolic debuggers.
6819 The symbols are not entered in the @command{@value{AS}} hash table: they
6820 cannot be referenced elsewhere in the source file.
6821 Up to five fields are required:
6822
6823 @table @var
6824 @item string
6825 This is the symbol's name. It may contain any character except
6826 @samp{\000}, so is more general than ordinary symbol names. Some
6827 debuggers used to code arbitrarily complex structures into symbol names
6828 using this field.
6829
6830 @item type
6831 An absolute expression. The symbol's type is set to the low 8 bits of
6832 this expression. Any bit pattern is permitted, but @code{@value{LD}}
6833 and debuggers choke on silly bit patterns.
6834
6835 @item other
6836 An absolute expression. The symbol's ``other'' attribute is set to the
6837 low 8 bits of this expression.
6838
6839 @item desc
6840 An absolute expression. The symbol's descriptor is set to the low 16
6841 bits of this expression.
6842
6843 @item value
6844 An absolute expression which becomes the symbol's value.
6845 @end table
6846
6847 If a warning is detected while reading a @code{.stabd}, @code{.stabn},
6848 or @code{.stabs} statement, the symbol has probably already been created;
6849 you get a half-formed symbol in your object file. This is
6850 compatible with earlier assemblers!
6851
6852 @table @code
6853 @cindex @code{stabd} directive
6854 @item .stabd @var{type} , @var{other} , @var{desc}
6855
6856 The ``name'' of the symbol generated is not even an empty string.
6857 It is a null pointer, for compatibility. Older assemblers used a
6858 null pointer so they didn't waste space in object files with empty
6859 strings.
6860
6861 The symbol's value is set to the location counter,
6862 relocatably. When your program is linked, the value of this symbol
6863 is the address of the location counter when the @code{.stabd} was
6864 assembled.
6865
6866 @cindex @code{stabn} directive
6867 @item .stabn @var{type} , @var{other} , @var{desc} , @var{value}
6868 The name of the symbol is set to the empty string @code{""}.
6869
6870 @cindex @code{stabs} directive
6871 @item .stabs @var{string} , @var{type} , @var{other} , @var{desc} , @var{value}
6872 All five fields are specified.
6873 @end table
6874 @end ifset
6875 @c end have-stabs
6876
6877 @node String
6878 @section @code{.string} "@var{str}", @code{.string8} "@var{str}", @code{.string16}
6879 "@var{str}", @code{.string32} "@var{str}", @code{.string64} "@var{str}"
6880
6881 @cindex string, copying to object file
6882 @cindex string8, copying to object file
6883 @cindex string16, copying to object file
6884 @cindex string32, copying to object file
6885 @cindex string64, copying to object file
6886 @cindex @code{string} directive
6887 @cindex @code{string8} directive
6888 @cindex @code{string16} directive
6889 @cindex @code{string32} directive
6890 @cindex @code{string64} directive
6891
6892 Copy the characters in @var{str} to the object file. You may specify more than
6893 one string to copy, separated by commas. Unless otherwise specified for a
6894 particular machine, the assembler marks the end of each string with a 0 byte.
6895 You can use any of the escape sequences described in @ref{Strings,,Strings}.
6896
6897 The variants @code{string16}, @code{string32} and @code{string64} differ from
6898 the @code{string} pseudo opcode in that each 8-bit character from @var{str} is
6899 copied and expanded to 16, 32 or 64 bits respectively. The expanded characters
6900 are stored in target endianness byte order.
6901
6902 Example:
6903 @smallexample
6904 .string32 "BYE"
6905 expands to:
6906 .string "B\0\0\0Y\0\0\0E\0\0\0" /* On little endian targets. */
6907 .string "\0\0\0B\0\0\0Y\0\0\0E" /* On big endian targets. */
6908 @end smallexample
6909
6910
6911 @node Struct
6912 @section @code{.struct @var{expression}}
6913
6914 @cindex @code{struct} directive
6915 Switch to the absolute section, and set the section offset to @var{expression},
6916 which must be an absolute expression. You might use this as follows:
6917 @smallexample
6918 .struct 0
6919 field1:
6920 .struct field1 + 4
6921 field2:
6922 .struct field2 + 4
6923 field3:
6924 @end smallexample
6925 This would define the symbol @code{field1} to have the value 0, the symbol
6926 @code{field2} to have the value 4, and the symbol @code{field3} to have the
6927 value 8. Assembly would be left in the absolute section, and you would need to
6928 use a @code{.section} directive of some sort to change to some other section
6929 before further assembly.
6930
6931 @ifset ELF
6932 @node SubSection
6933 @section @code{.subsection @var{name}}
6934
6935 @cindex @code{subsection} directive
6936 @cindex Section Stack
6937 This is one of the ELF section stack manipulation directives. The others are
6938 @code{.section} (@pxref{Section}), @code{.pushsection} (@pxref{PushSection}),
6939 @code{.popsection} (@pxref{PopSection}), and @code{.previous}
6940 (@pxref{Previous}).
6941
6942 This directive replaces the current subsection with @code{name}. The current
6943 section is not changed. The replaced subsection is put onto the section stack
6944 in place of the then current top of stack subsection.
6945 @end ifset
6946
6947 @ifset ELF
6948 @node Symver
6949 @section @code{.symver}
6950 @cindex @code{symver} directive
6951 @cindex symbol versioning
6952 @cindex versions of symbols
6953 Use the @code{.symver} directive to bind symbols to specific version nodes
6954 within a source file. This is only supported on ELF platforms, and is
6955 typically used when assembling files to be linked into a shared library.
6956 There are cases where it may make sense to use this in objects to be bound
6957 into an application itself so as to override a versioned symbol from a
6958 shared library.
6959
6960 For ELF targets, the @code{.symver} directive can be used like this:
6961 @smallexample
6962 .symver @var{name}, @var{name2@@nodename}
6963 @end smallexample
6964 If the symbol @var{name} is defined within the file
6965 being assembled, the @code{.symver} directive effectively creates a symbol
6966 alias with the name @var{name2@@nodename}, and in fact the main reason that we
6967 just don't try and create a regular alias is that the @var{@@} character isn't
6968 permitted in symbol names. The @var{name2} part of the name is the actual name
6969 of the symbol by which it will be externally referenced. The name @var{name}
6970 itself is merely a name of convenience that is used so that it is possible to
6971 have definitions for multiple versions of a function within a single source
6972 file, and so that the compiler can unambiguously know which version of a
6973 function is being mentioned. The @var{nodename} portion of the alias should be
6974 the name of a node specified in the version script supplied to the linker when
6975 building a shared library. If you are attempting to override a versioned
6976 symbol from a shared library, then @var{nodename} should correspond to the
6977 nodename of the symbol you are trying to override.
6978
6979 If the symbol @var{name} is not defined within the file being assembled, all
6980 references to @var{name} will be changed to @var{name2@@nodename}. If no
6981 reference to @var{name} is made, @var{name2@@nodename} will be removed from the
6982 symbol table.
6983
6984 Another usage of the @code{.symver} directive is:
6985 @smallexample
6986 .symver @var{name}, @var{name2@@@@nodename}
6987 @end smallexample
6988 In this case, the symbol @var{name} must exist and be defined within
6989 the file being assembled. It is similar to @var{name2@@nodename}. The
6990 difference is @var{name2@@@@nodename} will also be used to resolve
6991 references to @var{name2} by the linker.
6992
6993 The third usage of the @code{.symver} directive is:
6994 @smallexample
6995 .symver @var{name}, @var{name2@@@@@@nodename}
6996 @end smallexample
6997 When @var{name} is not defined within the
6998 file being assembled, it is treated as @var{name2@@nodename}. When
6999 @var{name} is defined within the file being assembled, the symbol
7000 name, @var{name}, will be changed to @var{name2@@@@nodename}.
7001 @end ifset
7002
7003 @ifset COFF
7004 @node Tag
7005 @section @code{.tag @var{structname}}
7006
7007 @cindex COFF structure debugging
7008 @cindex structure debugging, COFF
7009 @cindex @code{tag} directive
7010 This directive is generated by compilers to include auxiliary debugging
7011 information in the symbol table. It is only permitted inside
7012 @code{.def}/@code{.endef} pairs. Tags are used to link structure
7013 definitions in the symbol table with instances of those structures.
7014 @ifset BOUT
7015
7016 @samp{.tag} is only used when generating COFF format output; when
7017 @command{@value{AS}} is generating @code{b.out}, it accepts this directive but
7018 ignores it.
7019 @end ifset
7020 @end ifset
7021
7022 @node Text
7023 @section @code{.text @var{subsection}}
7024
7025 @cindex @code{text} directive
7026 Tells @command{@value{AS}} to assemble the following statements onto the end of
7027 the text subsection numbered @var{subsection}, which is an absolute
7028 expression. If @var{subsection} is omitted, subsection number zero
7029 is used.
7030
7031 @node Title
7032 @section @code{.title "@var{heading}"}
7033
7034 @cindex @code{title} directive
7035 @cindex listing control: title line
7036 Use @var{heading} as the title (second line, immediately after the
7037 source file name and pagenumber) when generating assembly listings.
7038
7039 This directive affects subsequent pages, as well as the current page if
7040 it appears within ten lines of the top of a page.
7041
7042 @ifset COFF-ELF
7043 @node Type
7044 @section @code{.type}
7045
7046 This directive is used to set the type of a symbol.
7047
7048 @ifset COFF
7049 @ifset ELF
7050 @c only print the extra heading if both COFF and ELF are set
7051 @subheading COFF Version
7052 @end ifset
7053
7054 @cindex COFF symbol type
7055 @cindex symbol type, COFF
7056 @cindex @code{type} directive (COFF version)
7057 For COFF targets, this directive is permitted only within
7058 @code{.def}/@code{.endef} pairs. It is used like this:
7059
7060 @smallexample
7061 .type @var{int}
7062 @end smallexample
7063
7064 This records the integer @var{int} as the type attribute of a symbol table
7065 entry.
7066
7067 @ifset BOUT
7068 @samp{.type} is associated only with COFF format output; when
7069 @command{@value{AS}} is configured for @code{b.out} output, it accepts this
7070 directive but ignores it.
7071 @end ifset
7072 @end ifset
7073
7074 @ifset ELF
7075 @ifset COFF
7076 @c only print the extra heading if both COFF and ELF are set
7077 @subheading ELF Version
7078 @end ifset
7079
7080 @cindex ELF symbol type
7081 @cindex symbol type, ELF
7082 @cindex @code{type} directive (ELF version)
7083 For ELF targets, the @code{.type} directive is used like this:
7084
7085 @smallexample
7086 .type @var{name} , @var{type description}
7087 @end smallexample
7088
7089 This sets the type of symbol @var{name} to be either a
7090 function symbol or an object symbol. There are five different syntaxes
7091 supported for the @var{type description} field, in order to provide
7092 compatibility with various other assemblers.
7093
7094 Because some of the characters used in these syntaxes (such as @samp{@@} and
7095 @samp{#}) are comment characters for some architectures, some of the syntaxes
7096 below do not work on all architectures. The first variant will be accepted by
7097 the GNU assembler on all architectures so that variant should be used for
7098 maximum portability, if you do not need to assemble your code with other
7099 assemblers.
7100
7101 The syntaxes supported are:
7102
7103 @smallexample
7104 .type <name> STT_<TYPE_IN_UPPER_CASE>
7105 .type <name>,#<type>
7106 .type <name>,@@<type>
7107 .type <name>,%<type>
7108 .type <name>,"<type>"
7109 @end smallexample
7110
7111 The types supported are:
7112
7113 @table @gcctabopt
7114 @item STT_FUNC
7115 @itemx function
7116 Mark the symbol as being a function name.
7117
7118 @item STT_GNU_IFUNC
7119 @itemx gnu_indirect_function
7120 Mark the symbol as an indirect function when evaluated during reloc
7121 processing. (This is only supported on assemblers targeting GNU systems).
7122
7123 @item STT_OBJECT
7124 @itemx object
7125 Mark the symbol as being a data object.
7126
7127 @item STT_TLS
7128 @itemx tls_object
7129 Mark the symbol as being a thread-local data object.
7130
7131 @item STT_COMMON
7132 @itemx common
7133 Mark the symbol as being a common data object.
7134
7135 @item STT_NOTYPE
7136 @itemx notype
7137 Does not mark the symbol in any way. It is supported just for completeness.
7138
7139 @item gnu_unique_object
7140 Marks the symbol as being a globally unique data object. The dynamic linker
7141 will make sure that in the entire process there is just one symbol with this
7142 name and type in use. (This is only supported on assemblers targeting GNU
7143 systems).
7144
7145 @end table
7146
7147 Note: Some targets support extra types in addition to those listed above.
7148
7149 @end ifset
7150 @end ifset
7151
7152 @node Uleb128
7153 @section @code{.uleb128 @var{expressions}}
7154
7155 @cindex @code{uleb128} directive
7156 @var{uleb128} stands for ``unsigned little endian base 128.'' This is a
7157 compact, variable length representation of numbers used by the DWARF
7158 symbolic debugging format. @xref{Sleb128, ,@code{.sleb128}}.
7159
7160 @ifset COFF
7161 @node Val
7162 @section @code{.val @var{addr}}
7163
7164 @cindex @code{val} directive
7165 @cindex COFF value attribute
7166 @cindex value attribute, COFF
7167 This directive, permitted only within @code{.def}/@code{.endef} pairs,
7168 records the address @var{addr} as the value attribute of a symbol table
7169 entry.
7170 @ifset BOUT
7171
7172 @samp{.val} is used only for COFF output; when @command{@value{AS}} is
7173 configured for @code{b.out}, it accepts this directive but ignores it.
7174 @end ifset
7175 @end ifset
7176
7177 @ifset ELF
7178 @node Version
7179 @section @code{.version "@var{string}"}
7180
7181 @cindex @code{version} directive
7182 This directive creates a @code{.note} section and places into it an ELF
7183 formatted note of type NT_VERSION. The note's name is set to @code{string}.
7184 @end ifset
7185
7186 @ifset ELF
7187 @node VTableEntry
7188 @section @code{.vtable_entry @var{table}, @var{offset}}
7189
7190 @cindex @code{vtable_entry} directive
7191 This directive finds or creates a symbol @code{table} and creates a
7192 @code{VTABLE_ENTRY} relocation for it with an addend of @code{offset}.
7193
7194 @node VTableInherit
7195 @section @code{.vtable_inherit @var{child}, @var{parent}}
7196
7197 @cindex @code{vtable_inherit} directive
7198 This directive finds the symbol @code{child} and finds or creates the symbol
7199 @code{parent} and then creates a @code{VTABLE_INHERIT} relocation for the
7200 parent whose addend is the value of the child symbol. As a special case the
7201 parent name of @code{0} is treated as referring to the @code{*ABS*} section.
7202 @end ifset
7203
7204 @node Warning
7205 @section @code{.warning "@var{string}"}
7206 @cindex warning directive
7207 Similar to the directive @code{.error}
7208 (@pxref{Error,,@code{.error "@var{string}"}}), but just emits a warning.
7209
7210 @node Weak
7211 @section @code{.weak @var{names}}
7212
7213 @cindex @code{weak} directive
7214 This directive sets the weak attribute on the comma separated list of symbol
7215 @code{names}. If the symbols do not already exist, they will be created.
7216
7217 On COFF targets other than PE, weak symbols are a GNU extension. This
7218 directive sets the weak attribute on the comma separated list of symbol
7219 @code{names}. If the symbols do not already exist, they will be created.
7220
7221 On the PE target, weak symbols are supported natively as weak aliases.
7222 When a weak symbol is created that is not an alias, GAS creates an
7223 alternate symbol to hold the default value.
7224
7225 @node Weakref
7226 @section @code{.weakref @var{alias}, @var{target}}
7227
7228 @cindex @code{weakref} directive
7229 This directive creates an alias to the target symbol that enables the symbol to
7230 be referenced with weak-symbol semantics, but without actually making it weak.
7231 If direct references or definitions of the symbol are present, then the symbol
7232 will not be weak, but if all references to it are through weak references, the
7233 symbol will be marked as weak in the symbol table.
7234
7235 The effect is equivalent to moving all references to the alias to a separate
7236 assembly source file, renaming the alias to the symbol in it, declaring the
7237 symbol as weak there, and running a reloadable link to merge the object files
7238 resulting from the assembly of the new source file and the old source file that
7239 had the references to the alias removed.
7240
7241 The alias itself never makes to the symbol table, and is entirely handled
7242 within the assembler.
7243
7244 @node Word
7245 @section @code{.word @var{expressions}}
7246
7247 @cindex @code{word} directive
7248 This directive expects zero or more @var{expressions}, of any section,
7249 separated by commas.
7250 @ifclear GENERIC
7251 @ifset W32
7252 For each expression, @command{@value{AS}} emits a 32-bit number.
7253 @end ifset
7254 @ifset W16
7255 For each expression, @command{@value{AS}} emits a 16-bit number.
7256 @end ifset
7257 @end ifclear
7258 @ifset GENERIC
7259
7260 The size of the number emitted, and its byte order,
7261 depend on what target computer the assembly is for.
7262 @end ifset
7263
7264 @c on amd29k, i960, sparc the "special treatment to support compilers" doesn't
7265 @c happen---32-bit addressability, period; no long/short jumps.
7266 @ifset DIFF-TBL-KLUGE
7267 @cindex difference tables altered
7268 @cindex altered difference tables
7269 @quotation
7270 @emph{Warning: Special Treatment to support Compilers}
7271 @end quotation
7272
7273 @ifset GENERIC
7274 Machines with a 32-bit address space, but that do less than 32-bit
7275 addressing, require the following special treatment. If the machine of
7276 interest to you does 32-bit addressing (or doesn't require it;
7277 @pxref{Machine Dependencies}), you can ignore this issue.
7278
7279 @end ifset
7280 In order to assemble compiler output into something that works,
7281 @command{@value{AS}} occasionally does strange things to @samp{.word} directives.
7282 Directives of the form @samp{.word sym1-sym2} are often emitted by
7283 compilers as part of jump tables. Therefore, when @command{@value{AS}} assembles a
7284 directive of the form @samp{.word sym1-sym2}, and the difference between
7285 @code{sym1} and @code{sym2} does not fit in 16 bits, @command{@value{AS}}
7286 creates a @dfn{secondary jump table}, immediately before the next label.
7287 This secondary jump table is preceded by a short-jump to the
7288 first byte after the secondary table. This short-jump prevents the flow
7289 of control from accidentally falling into the new table. Inside the
7290 table is a long-jump to @code{sym2}. The original @samp{.word}
7291 contains @code{sym1} minus the address of the long-jump to
7292 @code{sym2}.
7293
7294 If there were several occurrences of @samp{.word sym1-sym2} before the
7295 secondary jump table, all of them are adjusted. If there was a
7296 @samp{.word sym3-sym4}, that also did not fit in sixteen bits, a
7297 long-jump to @code{sym4} is included in the secondary jump table,
7298 and the @code{.word} directives are adjusted to contain @code{sym3}
7299 minus the address of the long-jump to @code{sym4}; and so on, for as many
7300 entries in the original jump table as necessary.
7301
7302 @ifset INTERNALS
7303 @emph{This feature may be disabled by compiling @command{@value{AS}} with the
7304 @samp{-DWORKING_DOT_WORD} option.} This feature is likely to confuse
7305 assembly language programmers.
7306 @end ifset
7307 @end ifset
7308 @c end DIFF-TBL-KLUGE
7309
7310 @ifclear no-space-dir
7311 @node Zero
7312 @section @code{.zero @var{size}}
7313
7314 @cindex @code{zero} directive
7315 @cindex filling memory with zero bytes
7316 This directive emits @var{size} 0-valued bytes. @var{size} must be an absolute
7317 expression. This directive is actually an alias for the @samp{.skip} directive
7318 so in can take an optional second argument of the value to store in the bytes
7319 instead of zero. Using @samp{.zero} in this way would be confusing however.
7320 @end ifclear
7321
7322 @node Deprecated
7323 @section Deprecated Directives
7324
7325 @cindex deprecated directives
7326 @cindex obsolescent directives
7327 One day these directives won't work.
7328 They are included for compatibility with older assemblers.
7329 @table @t
7330 @item .abort
7331 @item .line
7332 @end table
7333
7334 @ifset ELF
7335 @node Object Attributes
7336 @chapter Object Attributes
7337 @cindex object attributes
7338
7339 @command{@value{AS}} assembles source files written for a specific architecture
7340 into object files for that architecture. But not all object files are alike.
7341 Many architectures support incompatible variations. For instance, floating
7342 point arguments might be passed in floating point registers if the object file
7343 requires hardware floating point support---or floating point arguments might be
7344 passed in integer registers if the object file supports processors with no
7345 hardware floating point unit. Or, if two objects are built for different
7346 generations of the same architecture, the combination may require the
7347 newer generation at run-time.
7348
7349 This information is useful during and after linking. At link time,
7350 @command{@value{LD}} can warn about incompatible object files. After link
7351 time, tools like @command{gdb} can use it to process the linked file
7352 correctly.
7353
7354 Compatibility information is recorded as a series of object attributes. Each
7355 attribute has a @dfn{vendor}, @dfn{tag}, and @dfn{value}. The vendor is a
7356 string, and indicates who sets the meaning of the tag. The tag is an integer,
7357 and indicates what property the attribute describes. The value may be a string
7358 or an integer, and indicates how the property affects this object. Missing
7359 attributes are the same as attributes with a zero value or empty string value.
7360
7361 Object attributes were developed as part of the ABI for the ARM Architecture.
7362 The file format is documented in @cite{ELF for the ARM Architecture}.
7363
7364 @menu
7365 * GNU Object Attributes:: @sc{gnu} Object Attributes
7366 * Defining New Object Attributes:: Defining New Object Attributes
7367 @end menu
7368
7369 @node GNU Object Attributes
7370 @section @sc{gnu} Object Attributes
7371
7372 The @code{.gnu_attribute} directive records an object attribute
7373 with vendor @samp{gnu}.
7374
7375 Except for @samp{Tag_compatibility}, which has both an integer and a string for
7376 its value, @sc{gnu} attributes have a string value if the tag number is odd and
7377 an integer value if the tag number is even. The second bit (@code{@var{tag} &
7378 2} is set for architecture-independent attributes and clear for
7379 architecture-dependent ones.
7380
7381 @subsection Common @sc{gnu} attributes
7382
7383 These attributes are valid on all architectures.
7384
7385 @table @r
7386 @item Tag_compatibility (32)
7387 The compatibility attribute takes an integer flag value and a vendor name. If
7388 the flag value is 0, the file is compatible with other toolchains. If it is 1,
7389 then the file is only compatible with the named toolchain. If it is greater
7390 than 1, the file can only be processed by other toolchains under some private
7391 arrangement indicated by the flag value and the vendor name.
7392 @end table
7393
7394 @subsection MIPS Attributes
7395
7396 @table @r
7397 @item Tag_GNU_MIPS_ABI_FP (4)
7398 The floating-point ABI used by this object file. The value will be:
7399
7400 @itemize @bullet
7401 @item
7402 0 for files not affected by the floating-point ABI.
7403 @item
7404 1 for files using the hardware floating-point ABI with a standard
7405 double-precision FPU.
7406 @item
7407 2 for files using the hardware floating-point ABI with a single-precision FPU.
7408 @item
7409 3 for files using the software floating-point ABI.
7410 @item
7411 4 for files using the deprecated hardware floating-point ABI which used 64-bit
7412 floating-point registers, 32-bit general-purpose registers and increased the
7413 number of callee-saved floating-point registers.
7414 @item
7415 5 for files using the hardware floating-point ABI with a double-precision FPU
7416 with either 32-bit or 64-bit floating-point registers and 32-bit
7417 general-purpose registers.
7418 @item
7419 6 for files using the hardware floating-point ABI with 64-bit floating-point
7420 registers and 32-bit general-purpose registers.
7421 @item
7422 7 for files using the hardware floating-point ABI with 64-bit floating-point
7423 registers, 32-bit general-purpose registers and a rule that forbids the
7424 direct use of odd-numbered single-precision floating-point registers.
7425 @end itemize
7426 @end table
7427
7428 @subsection PowerPC Attributes
7429
7430 @table @r
7431 @item Tag_GNU_Power_ABI_FP (4)
7432 The floating-point ABI used by this object file. The value will be:
7433
7434 @itemize @bullet
7435 @item
7436 0 for files not affected by the floating-point ABI.
7437 @item
7438 1 for files using double-precision hardware floating-point ABI.
7439 @item
7440 2 for files using the software floating-point ABI.
7441 @item
7442 3 for files using single-precision hardware floating-point ABI.
7443 @end itemize
7444
7445 @item Tag_GNU_Power_ABI_Vector (8)
7446 The vector ABI used by this object file. The value will be:
7447
7448 @itemize @bullet
7449 @item
7450 0 for files not affected by the vector ABI.
7451 @item
7452 1 for files using general purpose registers to pass vectors.
7453 @item
7454 2 for files using AltiVec registers to pass vectors.
7455 @item
7456 3 for files using SPE registers to pass vectors.
7457 @end itemize
7458 @end table
7459
7460 @subsection IBM z Systems Attributes
7461
7462 @table @r
7463 @item Tag_GNU_S390_ABI_Vector (8)
7464 The vector ABI used by this object file. The value will be:
7465
7466 @itemize @bullet
7467 @item
7468 0 for files not affected by the vector ABI.
7469 @item
7470 1 for files using software vector ABI.
7471 @item
7472 2 for files using hardware vector ABI.
7473 @end itemize
7474 @end table
7475
7476 @node Defining New Object Attributes
7477 @section Defining New Object Attributes
7478
7479 If you want to define a new @sc{gnu} object attribute, here are the places you
7480 will need to modify. New attributes should be discussed on the @samp{binutils}
7481 mailing list.
7482
7483 @itemize @bullet
7484 @item
7485 This manual, which is the official register of attributes.
7486 @item
7487 The header for your architecture @file{include/elf}, to define the tag.
7488 @item
7489 The @file{bfd} support file for your architecture, to merge the attribute
7490 and issue any appropriate link warnings.
7491 @item
7492 Test cases in @file{ld/testsuite} for merging and link warnings.
7493 @item
7494 @file{binutils/readelf.c} to display your attribute.
7495 @item
7496 GCC, if you want the compiler to mark the attribute automatically.
7497 @end itemize
7498
7499 @end ifset
7500
7501 @ifset GENERIC
7502 @node Machine Dependencies
7503 @chapter Machine Dependent Features
7504
7505 @cindex machine dependencies
7506 The machine instruction sets are (almost by definition) different on
7507 each machine where @command{@value{AS}} runs. Floating point representations
7508 vary as well, and @command{@value{AS}} often supports a few additional
7509 directives or command-line options for compatibility with other
7510 assemblers on a particular platform. Finally, some versions of
7511 @command{@value{AS}} support special pseudo-instructions for branch
7512 optimization.
7513
7514 This chapter discusses most of these differences, though it does not
7515 include details on any machine's instruction set. For details on that
7516 subject, see the hardware manufacturer's manual.
7517
7518 @menu
7519 @ifset AARCH64
7520 * AArch64-Dependent:: AArch64 Dependent Features
7521 @end ifset
7522 @ifset ALPHA
7523 * Alpha-Dependent:: Alpha Dependent Features
7524 @end ifset
7525 @ifset ARC
7526 * ARC-Dependent:: ARC Dependent Features
7527 @end ifset
7528 @ifset ARM
7529 * ARM-Dependent:: ARM Dependent Features
7530 @end ifset
7531 @ifset AVR
7532 * AVR-Dependent:: AVR Dependent Features
7533 @end ifset
7534 @ifset Blackfin
7535 * Blackfin-Dependent:: Blackfin Dependent Features
7536 @end ifset
7537 @ifset CR16
7538 * CR16-Dependent:: CR16 Dependent Features
7539 @end ifset
7540 @ifset CRIS
7541 * CRIS-Dependent:: CRIS Dependent Features
7542 @end ifset
7543 @ifset D10V
7544 * D10V-Dependent:: D10V Dependent Features
7545 @end ifset
7546 @ifset D30V
7547 * D30V-Dependent:: D30V Dependent Features
7548 @end ifset
7549 @ifset EPIPHANY
7550 * Epiphany-Dependent:: EPIPHANY Dependent Features
7551 @end ifset
7552 @ifset H8/300
7553 * H8/300-Dependent:: Renesas H8/300 Dependent Features
7554 @end ifset
7555 @ifset HPPA
7556 * HPPA-Dependent:: HPPA Dependent Features
7557 @end ifset
7558 @ifset I370
7559 * ESA/390-Dependent:: IBM ESA/390 Dependent Features
7560 @end ifset
7561 @ifset I80386
7562 * i386-Dependent:: Intel 80386 and AMD x86-64 Dependent Features
7563 @end ifset
7564 @ifset I860
7565 * i860-Dependent:: Intel 80860 Dependent Features
7566 @end ifset
7567 @ifset I960
7568 * i960-Dependent:: Intel 80960 Dependent Features
7569 @end ifset
7570 @ifset IA64
7571 * IA-64-Dependent:: Intel IA-64 Dependent Features
7572 @end ifset
7573 @ifset IP2K
7574 * IP2K-Dependent:: IP2K Dependent Features
7575 @end ifset
7576 @ifset LM32
7577 * LM32-Dependent:: LM32 Dependent Features
7578 @end ifset
7579 @ifset M32C
7580 * M32C-Dependent:: M32C Dependent Features
7581 @end ifset
7582 @ifset M32R
7583 * M32R-Dependent:: M32R Dependent Features
7584 @end ifset
7585 @ifset M680X0
7586 * M68K-Dependent:: M680x0 Dependent Features
7587 @end ifset
7588 @ifset M68HC11
7589 * M68HC11-Dependent:: M68HC11 and 68HC12 Dependent Features
7590 @end ifset
7591 @ifset METAG
7592 * Meta-Dependent :: Meta Dependent Features
7593 @end ifset
7594 @ifset MICROBLAZE
7595 * MicroBlaze-Dependent:: MICROBLAZE Dependent Features
7596 @end ifset
7597 @ifset MIPS
7598 * MIPS-Dependent:: MIPS Dependent Features
7599 @end ifset
7600 @ifset MMIX
7601 * MMIX-Dependent:: MMIX Dependent Features
7602 @end ifset
7603 @ifset MSP430
7604 * MSP430-Dependent:: MSP430 Dependent Features
7605 @end ifset
7606 @ifset NDS32
7607 * NDS32-Dependent:: Andes NDS32 Dependent Features
7608 @end ifset
7609 @ifset NIOSII
7610 * NiosII-Dependent:: Altera Nios II Dependent Features
7611 @end ifset
7612 @ifset NS32K
7613 * NS32K-Dependent:: NS32K Dependent Features
7614 @end ifset
7615 @ifset PDP11
7616 * PDP-11-Dependent:: PDP-11 Dependent Features
7617 @end ifset
7618 @ifset PJ
7619 * PJ-Dependent:: picoJava Dependent Features
7620 @end ifset
7621 @ifset PPC
7622 * PPC-Dependent:: PowerPC Dependent Features
7623 @end ifset
7624 @ifset PRU
7625 * PRU-Dependent:: PRU Dependent Features
7626 @end ifset
7627 @ifset RL78
7628 * RL78-Dependent:: RL78 Dependent Features
7629 @end ifset
7630 @ifset RISCV
7631 * RISC-V-Dependent:: RISC-V Dependent Features
7632 @end ifset
7633 @ifset RX
7634 * RX-Dependent:: RX Dependent Features
7635 @end ifset
7636 @ifset S390
7637 * S/390-Dependent:: IBM S/390 Dependent Features
7638 @end ifset
7639 @ifset SCORE
7640 * SCORE-Dependent:: SCORE Dependent Features
7641 @end ifset
7642 @ifset SH
7643 * SH-Dependent:: Renesas / SuperH SH Dependent Features
7644 * SH64-Dependent:: SuperH SH64 Dependent Features
7645 @end ifset
7646 @ifset SPARC
7647 * Sparc-Dependent:: SPARC Dependent Features
7648 @end ifset
7649 @ifset TIC54X
7650 * TIC54X-Dependent:: TI TMS320C54x Dependent Features
7651 @end ifset
7652 @ifset TIC6X
7653 * TIC6X-Dependent :: TI TMS320C6x Dependent Features
7654 @end ifset
7655 @ifset TILEGX
7656 * TILE-Gx-Dependent :: Tilera TILE-Gx Dependent Features
7657 @end ifset
7658 @ifset TILEPRO
7659 * TILEPro-Dependent :: Tilera TILEPro Dependent Features
7660 @end ifset
7661 @ifset V850
7662 * V850-Dependent:: V850 Dependent Features
7663 @end ifset
7664 @ifset VAX
7665 * Vax-Dependent:: VAX Dependent Features
7666 @end ifset
7667 @ifset VISIUM
7668 * Visium-Dependent:: Visium Dependent Features
7669 @end ifset
7670 @ifset XGATE
7671 * XGATE-Dependent:: XGATE Features
7672 @end ifset
7673 @ifset XSTORMY16
7674 * XSTORMY16-Dependent:: XStormy16 Dependent Features
7675 @end ifset
7676 @ifset XTENSA
7677 * Xtensa-Dependent:: Xtensa Dependent Features
7678 @end ifset
7679 @ifset Z80
7680 * Z80-Dependent:: Z80 Dependent Features
7681 @end ifset
7682 @ifset Z8000
7683 * Z8000-Dependent:: Z8000 Dependent Features
7684 @end ifset
7685 @end menu
7686
7687 @lowersections
7688 @end ifset
7689
7690 @c The following major nodes are *sections* in the GENERIC version, *chapters*
7691 @c in single-cpu versions. This is mainly achieved by @lowersections. There is a
7692 @c peculiarity: to preserve cross-references, there must be a node called
7693 @c "Machine Dependencies". Hence the conditional nodenames in each
7694 @c major node below. Node defaulting in makeinfo requires adjacency of
7695 @c node and sectioning commands; hence the repetition of @chapter BLAH
7696 @c in both conditional blocks.
7697
7698 @ifset AARCH64
7699 @include c-aarch64.texi
7700 @end ifset
7701
7702 @ifset ALPHA
7703 @include c-alpha.texi
7704 @end ifset
7705
7706 @ifset ARC
7707 @include c-arc.texi
7708 @end ifset
7709
7710 @ifset ARM
7711 @include c-arm.texi
7712 @end ifset
7713
7714 @ifset AVR
7715 @include c-avr.texi
7716 @end ifset
7717
7718 @ifset Blackfin
7719 @include c-bfin.texi
7720 @end ifset
7721
7722 @ifset CR16
7723 @include c-cr16.texi
7724 @end ifset
7725
7726 @ifset CRIS
7727 @include c-cris.texi
7728 @end ifset
7729
7730 @ifset Renesas-all
7731 @ifclear GENERIC
7732 @node Machine Dependencies
7733 @chapter Machine Dependent Features
7734
7735 The machine instruction sets are different on each Renesas chip family,
7736 and there are also some syntax differences among the families. This
7737 chapter describes the specific @command{@value{AS}} features for each
7738 family.
7739
7740 @menu
7741 * H8/300-Dependent:: Renesas H8/300 Dependent Features
7742 * SH-Dependent:: Renesas SH Dependent Features
7743 @end menu
7744 @lowersections
7745 @end ifclear
7746 @end ifset
7747
7748 @ifset D10V
7749 @include c-d10v.texi
7750 @end ifset
7751
7752 @ifset D30V
7753 @include c-d30v.texi
7754 @end ifset
7755
7756 @ifset EPIPHANY
7757 @include c-epiphany.texi
7758 @end ifset
7759
7760 @ifset H8/300
7761 @include c-h8300.texi
7762 @end ifset
7763
7764 @ifset HPPA
7765 @include c-hppa.texi
7766 @end ifset
7767
7768 @ifset I370
7769 @include c-i370.texi
7770 @end ifset
7771
7772 @ifset I80386
7773 @include c-i386.texi
7774 @end ifset
7775
7776 @ifset I860
7777 @include c-i860.texi
7778 @end ifset
7779
7780 @ifset I960
7781 @include c-i960.texi
7782 @end ifset
7783
7784 @ifset IA64
7785 @include c-ia64.texi
7786 @end ifset
7787
7788 @ifset IP2K
7789 @include c-ip2k.texi
7790 @end ifset
7791
7792 @ifset LM32
7793 @include c-lm32.texi
7794 @end ifset
7795
7796 @ifset M32C
7797 @include c-m32c.texi
7798 @end ifset
7799
7800 @ifset M32R
7801 @include c-m32r.texi
7802 @end ifset
7803
7804 @ifset M680X0
7805 @include c-m68k.texi
7806 @end ifset
7807
7808 @ifset M68HC11
7809 @include c-m68hc11.texi
7810 @end ifset
7811
7812 @ifset METAG
7813 @include c-metag.texi
7814 @end ifset
7815
7816 @ifset MICROBLAZE
7817 @include c-microblaze.texi
7818 @end ifset
7819
7820 @ifset MIPS
7821 @include c-mips.texi
7822 @end ifset
7823
7824 @ifset MMIX
7825 @include c-mmix.texi
7826 @end ifset
7827
7828 @ifset MSP430
7829 @include c-msp430.texi
7830 @end ifset
7831
7832 @ifset NDS32
7833 @include c-nds32.texi
7834 @end ifset
7835
7836 @ifset NIOSII
7837 @include c-nios2.texi
7838 @end ifset
7839
7840 @ifset NS32K
7841 @include c-ns32k.texi
7842 @end ifset
7843
7844 @ifset PDP11
7845 @include c-pdp11.texi
7846 @end ifset
7847
7848 @ifset PJ
7849 @include c-pj.texi
7850 @end ifset
7851
7852 @ifset PPC
7853 @include c-ppc.texi
7854 @end ifset
7855
7856 @ifset PRU
7857 @include c-pru.texi
7858 @end ifset
7859
7860 @ifset RL78
7861 @include c-rl78.texi
7862 @end ifset
7863
7864 @ifset RISCV
7865 @include c-riscv.texi
7866 @end ifset
7867
7868 @ifset RX
7869 @include c-rx.texi
7870 @end ifset
7871
7872 @ifset S390
7873 @include c-s390.texi
7874 @end ifset
7875
7876 @ifset SCORE
7877 @include c-score.texi
7878 @end ifset
7879
7880 @ifset SH
7881 @include c-sh.texi
7882 @include c-sh64.texi
7883 @end ifset
7884
7885 @ifset SPARC
7886 @include c-sparc.texi
7887 @end ifset
7888
7889 @ifset TIC54X
7890 @include c-tic54x.texi
7891 @end ifset
7892
7893 @ifset TIC6X
7894 @include c-tic6x.texi
7895 @end ifset
7896
7897 @ifset TILEGX
7898 @include c-tilegx.texi
7899 @end ifset
7900
7901 @ifset TILEPRO
7902 @include c-tilepro.texi
7903 @end ifset
7904
7905 @ifset V850
7906 @include c-v850.texi
7907 @end ifset
7908
7909 @ifset VAX
7910 @include c-vax.texi
7911 @end ifset
7912
7913 @ifset VISIUM
7914 @include c-visium.texi
7915 @end ifset
7916
7917 @ifset XGATE
7918 @include c-xgate.texi
7919 @end ifset
7920
7921 @ifset XSTORMY16
7922 @include c-xstormy16.texi
7923 @end ifset
7924
7925 @ifset XTENSA
7926 @include c-xtensa.texi
7927 @end ifset
7928
7929 @ifset Z80
7930 @include c-z80.texi
7931 @end ifset
7932
7933 @ifset Z8000
7934 @include c-z8k.texi
7935 @end ifset
7936
7937 @ifset GENERIC
7938 @c reverse effect of @down at top of generic Machine-Dep chapter
7939 @raisesections
7940 @end ifset
7941
7942 @node Reporting Bugs
7943 @chapter Reporting Bugs
7944 @cindex bugs in assembler
7945 @cindex reporting bugs in assembler
7946
7947 Your bug reports play an essential role in making @command{@value{AS}} reliable.
7948
7949 Reporting a bug may help you by bringing a solution to your problem, or it may
7950 not. But in any case the principal function of a bug report is to help the
7951 entire community by making the next version of @command{@value{AS}} work better.
7952 Bug reports are your contribution to the maintenance of @command{@value{AS}}.
7953
7954 In order for a bug report to serve its purpose, you must include the
7955 information that enables us to fix the bug.
7956
7957 @menu
7958 * Bug Criteria:: Have you found a bug?
7959 * Bug Reporting:: How to report bugs
7960 @end menu
7961
7962 @node Bug Criteria
7963 @section Have You Found a Bug?
7964 @cindex bug criteria
7965
7966 If you are not sure whether you have found a bug, here are some guidelines:
7967
7968 @itemize @bullet
7969 @cindex fatal signal
7970 @cindex assembler crash
7971 @cindex crash of assembler
7972 @item
7973 If the assembler gets a fatal signal, for any input whatever, that is a
7974 @command{@value{AS}} bug. Reliable assemblers never crash.
7975
7976 @cindex error on valid input
7977 @item
7978 If @command{@value{AS}} produces an error message for valid input, that is a bug.
7979
7980 @cindex invalid input
7981 @item
7982 If @command{@value{AS}} does not produce an error message for invalid input, that
7983 is a bug. However, you should note that your idea of ``invalid input'' might
7984 be our idea of ``an extension'' or ``support for traditional practice''.
7985
7986 @item
7987 If you are an experienced user of assemblers, your suggestions for improvement
7988 of @command{@value{AS}} are welcome in any case.
7989 @end itemize
7990
7991 @node Bug Reporting
7992 @section How to Report Bugs
7993 @cindex bug reports
7994 @cindex assembler bugs, reporting
7995
7996 A number of companies and individuals offer support for @sc{gnu} products. If
7997 you obtained @command{@value{AS}} from a support organization, we recommend you
7998 contact that organization first.
7999
8000 You can find contact information for many support companies and
8001 individuals in the file @file{etc/SERVICE} in the @sc{gnu} Emacs
8002 distribution.
8003
8004 @ifset BUGURL
8005 In any event, we also recommend that you send bug reports for @command{@value{AS}}
8006 to @value{BUGURL}.
8007 @end ifset
8008
8009 The fundamental principle of reporting bugs usefully is this:
8010 @strong{report all the facts}. If you are not sure whether to state a
8011 fact or leave it out, state it!
8012
8013 Often people omit facts because they think they know what causes the problem
8014 and assume that some details do not matter. Thus, you might assume that the
8015 name of a symbol you use in an example does not matter. Well, probably it does
8016 not, but one cannot be sure. Perhaps the bug is a stray memory reference which
8017 happens to fetch from the location where that name is stored in memory;
8018 perhaps, if the name were different, the contents of that location would fool
8019 the assembler into doing the right thing despite the bug. Play it safe and
8020 give a specific, complete example. That is the easiest thing for you to do,
8021 and the most helpful.
8022
8023 Keep in mind that the purpose of a bug report is to enable us to fix the bug if
8024 it is new to us. Therefore, always write your bug reports on the assumption
8025 that the bug has not been reported previously.
8026
8027 Sometimes people give a few sketchy facts and ask, ``Does this ring a
8028 bell?'' This cannot help us fix a bug, so it is basically useless. We
8029 respond by asking for enough details to enable us to investigate.
8030 You might as well expedite matters by sending them to begin with.
8031
8032 To enable us to fix the bug, you should include all these things:
8033
8034 @itemize @bullet
8035 @item
8036 The version of @command{@value{AS}}. @command{@value{AS}} announces it if you start
8037 it with the @samp{--version} argument.
8038
8039 Without this, we will not know whether there is any point in looking for
8040 the bug in the current version of @command{@value{AS}}.
8041
8042 @item
8043 Any patches you may have applied to the @command{@value{AS}} source.
8044
8045 @item
8046 The type of machine you are using, and the operating system name and
8047 version number.
8048
8049 @item
8050 What compiler (and its version) was used to compile @command{@value{AS}}---e.g.
8051 ``@code{gcc-2.7}''.
8052
8053 @item
8054 The command arguments you gave the assembler to assemble your example and
8055 observe the bug. To guarantee you will not omit something important, list them
8056 all. A copy of the Makefile (or the output from make) is sufficient.
8057
8058 If we were to try to guess the arguments, we would probably guess wrong
8059 and then we might not encounter the bug.
8060
8061 @item
8062 A complete input file that will reproduce the bug. If the bug is observed when
8063 the assembler is invoked via a compiler, send the assembler source, not the
8064 high level language source. Most compilers will produce the assembler source
8065 when run with the @samp{-S} option. If you are using @code{@value{GCC}}, use
8066 the options @samp{-v --save-temps}; this will save the assembler source in a
8067 file with an extension of @file{.s}, and also show you exactly how
8068 @command{@value{AS}} is being run.
8069
8070 @item
8071 A description of what behavior you observe that you believe is
8072 incorrect. For example, ``It gets a fatal signal.''
8073
8074 Of course, if the bug is that @command{@value{AS}} gets a fatal signal, then we
8075 will certainly notice it. But if the bug is incorrect output, we might not
8076 notice unless it is glaringly wrong. You might as well not give us a chance to
8077 make a mistake.
8078
8079 Even if the problem you experience is a fatal signal, you should still say so
8080 explicitly. Suppose something strange is going on, such as, your copy of
8081 @command{@value{AS}} is out of sync, or you have encountered a bug in the C
8082 library on your system. (This has happened!) Your copy might crash and ours
8083 would not. If you told us to expect a crash, then when ours fails to crash, we
8084 would know that the bug was not happening for us. If you had not told us to
8085 expect a crash, then we would not be able to draw any conclusion from our
8086 observations.
8087
8088 @item
8089 If you wish to suggest changes to the @command{@value{AS}} source, send us context
8090 diffs, as generated by @code{diff} with the @samp{-u}, @samp{-c}, or @samp{-p}
8091 option. Always send diffs from the old file to the new file. If you even
8092 discuss something in the @command{@value{AS}} source, refer to it by context, not
8093 by line number.
8094
8095 The line numbers in our development sources will not match those in your
8096 sources. Your line numbers would convey no useful information to us.
8097 @end itemize
8098
8099 Here are some things that are not necessary:
8100
8101 @itemize @bullet
8102 @item
8103 A description of the envelope of the bug.
8104
8105 Often people who encounter a bug spend a lot of time investigating
8106 which changes to the input file will make the bug go away and which
8107 changes will not affect it.
8108
8109 This is often time consuming and not very useful, because the way we
8110 will find the bug is by running a single example under the debugger
8111 with breakpoints, not by pure deduction from a series of examples.
8112 We recommend that you save your time for something else.
8113
8114 Of course, if you can find a simpler example to report @emph{instead}
8115 of the original one, that is a convenience for us. Errors in the
8116 output will be easier to spot, running under the debugger will take
8117 less time, and so on.
8118
8119 However, simplification is not vital; if you do not want to do this,
8120 report the bug anyway and send us the entire test case you used.
8121
8122 @item
8123 A patch for the bug.
8124
8125 A patch for the bug does help us if it is a good one. But do not omit
8126 the necessary information, such as the test case, on the assumption that
8127 a patch is all we need. We might see problems with your patch and decide
8128 to fix the problem another way, or we might not understand it at all.
8129
8130 Sometimes with a program as complicated as @command{@value{AS}} it is very hard to
8131 construct an example that will make the program follow a certain path through
8132 the code. If you do not send us the example, we will not be able to construct
8133 one, so we will not be able to verify that the bug is fixed.
8134
8135 And if we cannot understand what bug you are trying to fix, or why your
8136 patch should be an improvement, we will not install it. A test case will
8137 help us to understand.
8138
8139 @item
8140 A guess about what the bug is or what it depends on.
8141
8142 Such guesses are usually wrong. Even we cannot guess right about such
8143 things without first using the debugger to find the facts.
8144 @end itemize
8145
8146 @node Acknowledgements
8147 @chapter Acknowledgements
8148
8149 If you have contributed to GAS and your name isn't listed here,
8150 it is not meant as a slight. We just don't know about it. Send mail to the
8151 maintainer, and we'll correct the situation. Currently
8152 @c (October 2012),
8153 the maintainer is Nick Clifton (email address @code{nickc@@redhat.com}).
8154
8155 Dean Elsner wrote the original @sc{gnu} assembler for the VAX.@footnote{Any
8156 more details?}
8157
8158 Jay Fenlason maintained GAS for a while, adding support for GDB-specific debug
8159 information and the 68k series machines, most of the preprocessing pass, and
8160 extensive changes in @file{messages.c}, @file{input-file.c}, @file{write.c}.
8161
8162 K. Richard Pixley maintained GAS for a while, adding various enhancements and
8163 many bug fixes, including merging support for several processors, breaking GAS
8164 up to handle multiple object file format back ends (including heavy rewrite,
8165 testing, an integration of the coff and b.out back ends), adding configuration
8166 including heavy testing and verification of cross assemblers and file splits
8167 and renaming, converted GAS to strictly ANSI C including full prototypes, added
8168 support for m680[34]0 and cpu32, did considerable work on i960 including a COFF
8169 port (including considerable amounts of reverse engineering), a SPARC opcode
8170 file rewrite, DECstation, rs6000, and hp300hpux host ports, updated ``know''
8171 assertions and made them work, much other reorganization, cleanup, and lint.
8172
8173 Ken Raeburn wrote the high-level BFD interface code to replace most of the code
8174 in format-specific I/O modules.
8175
8176 The original VMS support was contributed by David L. Kashtan. Eric Youngdale
8177 has done much work with it since.
8178
8179 The Intel 80386 machine description was written by Eliot Dresselhaus.
8180
8181 Minh Tran-Le at IntelliCorp contributed some AIX 386 support.
8182
8183 The Motorola 88k machine description was contributed by Devon Bowen of Buffalo
8184 University and Torbjorn Granlund of the Swedish Institute of Computer Science.
8185
8186 Keith Knowles at the Open Software Foundation wrote the original MIPS back end
8187 (@file{tc-mips.c}, @file{tc-mips.h}), and contributed Rose format support
8188 (which hasn't been merged in yet). Ralph Campbell worked with the MIPS code to
8189 support a.out format.
8190
8191 Support for the Zilog Z8k and Renesas H8/300 processors (tc-z8k,
8192 tc-h8300), and IEEE 695 object file format (obj-ieee), was written by
8193 Steve Chamberlain of Cygnus Support. Steve also modified the COFF back end to
8194 use BFD for some low-level operations, for use with the H8/300 and AMD 29k
8195 targets.
8196
8197 John Gilmore built the AMD 29000 support, added @code{.include} support, and
8198 simplified the configuration of which versions accept which directives. He
8199 updated the 68k machine description so that Motorola's opcodes always produced
8200 fixed-size instructions (e.g., @code{jsr}), while synthetic instructions
8201 remained shrinkable (@code{jbsr}). John fixed many bugs, including true tested
8202 cross-compilation support, and one bug in relaxation that took a week and
8203 required the proverbial one-bit fix.
8204
8205 Ian Lance Taylor of Cygnus Support merged the Motorola and MIT syntax for the
8206 68k, completed support for some COFF targets (68k, i386 SVR3, and SCO Unix),
8207 added support for MIPS ECOFF and ELF targets, wrote the initial RS/6000 and
8208 PowerPC assembler, and made a few other minor patches.
8209
8210 Steve Chamberlain made GAS able to generate listings.
8211
8212 Hewlett-Packard contributed support for the HP9000/300.
8213
8214 Jeff Law wrote GAS and BFD support for the native HPPA object format (SOM)
8215 along with a fairly extensive HPPA testsuite (for both SOM and ELF object
8216 formats). This work was supported by both the Center for Software Science at
8217 the University of Utah and Cygnus Support.
8218
8219 Support for ELF format files has been worked on by Mark Eichin of Cygnus
8220 Support (original, incomplete implementation for SPARC), Pete Hoogenboom and
8221 Jeff Law at the University of Utah (HPPA mainly), Michael Meissner of the Open
8222 Software Foundation (i386 mainly), and Ken Raeburn of Cygnus Support (sparc,
8223 and some initial 64-bit support).
8224
8225 Linas Vepstas added GAS support for the ESA/390 ``IBM 370'' architecture.
8226
8227 Richard Henderson rewrote the Alpha assembler. Klaus Kaempf wrote GAS and BFD
8228 support for openVMS/Alpha.
8229
8230 Timothy Wall, Michael Hayes, and Greg Smart contributed to the various tic*
8231 flavors.
8232
8233 David Heine, Sterling Augustine, Bob Wilson and John Ruttenberg from Tensilica,
8234 Inc.@: added support for Xtensa processors.
8235
8236 Several engineers at Cygnus Support have also provided many small bug fixes and
8237 configuration enhancements.
8238
8239 Jon Beniston added support for the Lattice Mico32 architecture.
8240
8241 Many others have contributed large or small bugfixes and enhancements. If
8242 you have contributed significant work and are not mentioned on this list, and
8243 want to be, let us know. Some of the history has been lost; we are not
8244 intentionally leaving anyone out.
8245
8246 @node GNU Free Documentation License
8247 @appendix GNU Free Documentation License
8248 @include fdl.texi
8249
8250 @node AS Index
8251 @unnumbered AS Index
8252
8253 @printindex cp
8254
8255 @bye
8256 @c Local Variables:
8257 @c fill-column: 79
8258 @c End:
This page took 0.24505 seconds and 4 git commands to generate.